doc/geany.html

   1 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" ?>
   2 <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
   3 <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en">
   4 <head>
   5 <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8" />
   6 <meta name="generator" content="Docutils 0.4: http://docutils.sourceforge.net/" />
   7 <title>Geany</title>
   8 <meta name="authors" content="Enrico Tröger  Nick Treleaven  Frank Lanitz" />
   9 <meta name="date" content="2010-08-11" />
  10 <style type="text/css">
  11
  12 /*
  13 :Author: Enrico Troeger
  14 :Contact: enrico(dot)troeger(at)uvena(dot)de
  15 :Copyright: This stylesheet has been placed in the public domain.
  16
  17 Stylesheet for Geany's documentation based on a version of John Gabriele.
  18 */
  19
  20 @media screen {
  21
  22         body {
  23                 background-color: #f2f2f2;
  24                 color: #404040;
  25                 margin-left: 0.4em;
  26                 max-width: 60em;
  27                 font-size: 90%;
  28         }
  29
  30         a {
  31                 color: #990000;
  32         }
  33
  34         a:visited {
  35                 color: #7E558E;
  36         }
  37
  38         a:hover {
  39                 text-decoration: none;
  40         }
  41
  42         h1 {
  43                 border-top: 1px dotted;
  44                 margin-top: 2em;
  45         }
  46
  47         h1, h2, h3 {
  48                 font-family: sans-serif;
  49                 color: #5D0606;
  50         }
  51
  52         h1.title {
  53           text-align: left }
  54
  55         h2 {
  56                 margin-top: 30px;
  57         }
  58
  59         h2.subtitle {
  60           text-align: left }
  61
  62         h3 {
  63                 padding-left: 3px;
  64         }
  65
  66         blockquote, pre {
  67                 border: 1px solid;
  68                 padding: 0.4em;
  69         }
  70
  71         blockquote {
  72                 font-family: sans-serif;
  73                 background-color: #DBEDD5;
  74                 border: 1px dotted;
  75                 border-left: 4px solid;
  76                 border-color: #9FD98C;
  77         }
  78
  79         pre {
  80                 background-color: #ECDFCE;
  81                 border: 1px dotted;
  82                 border-left: 4px solid;
  83                 border-color: #D9BE9A;
  84         }
  85
  86         tt, pre, code {
  87                 color: #6D4212;
  88         }
  89
  90         table {
  91                 border: 1px solid #D9BE9A;
  92         }
  93
  94         th {
  95                 background-color: #ECDFCE;
  96                 border: 1px dotted #D9BE9A;
  97         }
  98
  99         td {
 100                 border: 1px dotted #D9BE9A;
 101         }
 102
 103         .docinfo-name {
 104                 color: #5D0606;
 105         }
 106
 107         p.admonition-title {
 108                 color: #990000;
 109                 font-weight: bold;
 110         }
 111
 112         div.note {
 113                 margin: 1em 3em;
 114                 padding: 0em;
 115         }
 116
 117         dt {
 118                 font-style: italic;
 119         }
 120
 121 }
 122
 123 @media print {
 124
 125 }
 126
 127 </style>
 128 </head>
 129 <body>
 130 <div class="document" id="geany">
 131 <h1 class="title">Geany</h1>
 132 <h2 class="subtitle" id="a-fast-light-gtk-ide">A fast, light, GTK+ IDE</h2>
 133 <table class="docinfo" frame="void" rules="none">
 134 <col class="docinfo-name" />
 135 <col class="docinfo-content" />
 136 <tbody valign="top">
 137 <tr><th class="docinfo-name">Authors:</th>
 138 <td>Enrico Tröger
 139 <br />Nick Treleaven
 140 <br />Frank Lanitz</td></tr>
 141 <tr><th class="docinfo-name">Date:</th>
 142 <td>2010-08-11</td></tr>
 143 <tr><th class="docinfo-name">Version:</th>
 144 <td>0.19.1</td></tr>
 145 </tbody>
 146 </table>
 147 <p>Copyright © 2005-2010</p>
 148 <p>This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public
 149 License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
 150 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. A copy of this
 151 license can be found in the file COPYING included with the source code
 152 of this program, and also in the chapter <a class="reference" href="#gnu-general-public-license">GNU General Public License</a>.</p>
 153 <div class="contents topic">
 154 <p class="topic-title first"><a id="contents" name="contents">Contents</a></p>
 155 <ul class="simple">
 156 <li><a class="reference" href="#introduction" id="id8" name="id8">Introduction</a><ul>
 157 <li><a class="reference" href="#about-geany" id="id9" name="id9">About Geany</a></li>
 158 <li><a class="reference" href="#where-to-get-it" id="id10" name="id10">Where to get it</a></li>
 159 <li><a class="reference" href="#license" id="id11" name="id11">License</a></li>
 160 <li><a class="reference" href="#about-this-document" id="id12" name="id12">About this document</a></li>
 161 </ul>
 162 </li>
 163 <li><a class="reference" href="#installation" id="id13" name="id13">Installation</a><ul>
 164 <li><a class="reference" href="#requirements" id="id14" name="id14">Requirements</a></li>
 165 <li><a class="reference" href="#binary-packages" id="id15" name="id15">Binary packages</a></li>
 166 <li><a class="reference" href="#source-compilation" id="id16" name="id16">Source compilation</a><ul>
 167 <li><a class="reference" href="#autotools-based-build-system" id="id17" name="id17">Autotools based build system</a></li>
 168 <li><a class="reference" href="#waf-based-build-system" id="id18" name="id18">Waf based build system</a><ul>
 169 <li><a class="reference" href="#waf-cache" id="id19" name="id19">Waf Cache</a><ul>
 170 <li><a class="reference" href="#cleaning-the-cache" id="id20" name="id20">Cleaning the Cache</a></li>
 171 </ul>
 172 </li>
 173 </ul>
 174 </li>
 175 <li><a class="reference" href="#custom-installation" id="id21" name="id21">Custom installation</a></li>
 176 <li><a class="reference" href="#dynamic-linking-loader-support-and-vte" id="id22" name="id22">Dynamic linking loader support and VTE</a></li>
 177 <li><a class="reference" href="#build-problems" id="id23" name="id23">Build problems</a></li>
 178 </ul>
 179 </li>
 180 <li><a class="reference" href="#installation-prefix" id="id24" name="id24">Installation prefix</a></li>
 181 </ul>
 182 </li>
 183 <li><a class="reference" href="#usage" id="id25" name="id25">Usage</a><ul>
 184 <li><a class="reference" href="#getting-started" id="id26" name="id26">Getting started</a></li>
 185 <li><a class="reference" href="#the-geany-workspace" id="id27" name="id27">The Geany workspace</a></li>
 186 <li><a class="reference" href="#command-line-options" id="id28" name="id28">Command line options</a></li>
 187 <li><a class="reference" href="#general" id="id29" name="id29">General</a><ul>
 188 <li><a class="reference" href="#startup" id="id30" name="id30">Startup</a></li>
 189 <li><a class="reference" href="#opening-files-from-the-command-line-in-a-running-instance" id="id31" name="id31">Opening files from the command-line in a running instance</a></li>
 190 <li><a class="reference" href="#virtual-terminal-emulator-widget-vte" id="id32" name="id32">Virtual terminal emulator widget (VTE)</a></li>
 191 <li><a class="reference" href="#defining-own-widget-styles-using-gtkrc-2-0" id="id33" name="id33">Defining own widget styles using .gtkrc-2.0</a></li>
 192 </ul>
 193 </li>
 194 <li><a class="reference" href="#documents" id="id34" name="id34">Documents</a><ul>
 195 <li><a class="reference" href="#switching-between-documents" id="id35" name="id35">Switching between documents</a></li>
 196 </ul>
 197 </li>
 198 <li><a class="reference" href="#character-sets-and-unicode-byte-order-mark-bom" id="id36" name="id36">Character sets and Unicode Byte-Order-Mark (BOM)</a><ul>
 199 <li><a class="reference" href="#using-character-sets" id="id37" name="id37">Using character sets</a></li>
 200 <li><a class="reference" href="#in-file-encoding-specification" id="id38" name="id38">In-file encoding specification</a></li>
 201 <li><a class="reference" href="#special-encoding-none" id="id39" name="id39">Special encoding &quot;None&quot;</a></li>
 202 <li><a class="reference" href="#unicode-byte-order-mark-bom" id="id40" name="id40">Unicode Byte-Order-Mark (BOM)</a></li>
 203 </ul>
 204 </li>
 205 <li><a class="reference" href="#editing" id="id41" name="id41">Editing</a><ul>
 206 <li><a class="reference" href="#folding" id="id42" name="id42">Folding</a></li>
 207 <li><a class="reference" href="#column-mode-editing-rectangular-selections" id="id43" name="id43">Column mode editing (rectangular selections)</a></li>
 208 <li><a class="reference" href="#drag-and-drop-of-text" id="id44" name="id44">Drag and drop of text</a></li>
 209 <li><a class="reference" href="#indentation" id="id45" name="id45">Indentation</a></li>
 210 <li><a class="reference" href="#auto-indentation" id="id46" name="id46">Auto-indentation</a></li>
 211 <li><a class="reference" href="#bookmarks" id="id47" name="id47">Bookmarks</a></li>
 212 <li><a class="reference" href="#code-navigation-history" id="id48" name="id48">Code navigation history</a></li>
 213 <li><a class="reference" href="#sending-text-through-custom-commands" id="id49" name="id49">Sending text through custom commands</a></li>
 214 <li><a class="reference" href="#context-actions" id="id50" name="id50">Context actions</a></li>
 215 <li><a class="reference" href="#autocompletion" id="id51" name="id51">Autocompletion</a><ul>
 216 <li><a class="reference" href="#word-part-completion" id="id52" name="id52">Word part completion</a></li>
 217 <li><a class="reference" href="#scope-autocompletion" id="id53" name="id53">Scope autocompletion</a></li>
 218 </ul>
 219 </li>
 220 <li><a class="reference" href="#user-definable-snippets" id="id54" name="id54">User-definable snippets</a></li>
 221 <li><a class="reference" href="#inserting-unicode-characters" id="id55" name="id55">Inserting Unicode characters</a></li>
 222 </ul>
 223 </li>
 224 <li><a class="reference" href="#search-replace-and-go-to" id="id56" name="id56">Search, replace and go to</a><ul>
 225 <li><a class="reference" href="#toolbar-entries" id="id57" name="id57">Toolbar entries</a><ul>
 226 <li><a class="reference" href="#search-bar" id="id58" name="id58">Search bar</a></li>
 227 </ul>
 228 </li>
 229 <li><a class="reference" href="#find" id="id59" name="id59">Find</a><ul>
 230 <li><a class="reference" href="#matching-options" id="id60" name="id60">Matching options</a></li>
 231 <li><a class="reference" href="#find-all" id="id61" name="id61">Find all</a></li>
 232 <li><a class="reference" href="#change-font-in-search-dialog-text-fields" id="id62" name="id62">Change font in search dialog text fields</a></li>
 233 </ul>
 234 </li>
 235 <li><a class="reference" href="#find-usage" id="id63" name="id63">Find usage</a></li>
 236 <li><a class="reference" href="#find-in-files" id="id64" name="id64">Find in files</a><ul>
 237 <li><a class="reference" href="#filtering-out-version-control-files" id="id65" name="id65">Filtering out version control files</a></li>
 238 </ul>
 239 </li>
 240 <li><a class="reference" href="#replace" id="id66" name="id66">Replace</a><ul>
 241 <li><a class="reference" href="#replace-all" id="id67" name="id67">Replace all</a></li>
 242 </ul>
 243 </li>
 244 <li><a class="reference" href="#go-to-tag-definition" id="id68" name="id68">Go to tag definition</a></li>
 245 <li><a class="reference" href="#go-to-tag-declaration" id="id69" name="id69">Go to tag declaration</a></li>
 246 <li><a class="reference" href="#go-to-line" id="id70" name="id70">Go to line</a></li>
 247 <li><a class="reference" href="#regular-expressions" id="id71" name="id71">Regular expressions</a></li>
 248 </ul>
 249 </li>
 250 <li><a class="reference" href="#tags" id="id72" name="id72">Tags</a><ul>
 251 <li><a class="reference" href="#workspace-tags" id="id73" name="id73">Workspace tags</a></li>
 252 <li><a class="reference" href="#global-tags" id="id74" name="id74">Global tags</a><ul>
 253 <li><a class="reference" href="#default-global-tags-files" id="id75" name="id75">Default global tags files</a></li>
 254 <li><a class="reference" href="#global-tags-file-format" id="id76" name="id76">Global tags file format</a></li>
 255 <li><a class="reference" href="#generating-a-global-tags-file" id="id77" name="id77">Generating a global tags file</a></li>
 256 </ul>
 257 </li>
 258 <li><a class="reference" href="#ignore-tags" id="id78" name="id78">Ignore tags</a></li>
 259 </ul>
 260 </li>
 261 <li><a class="reference" href="#preferences" id="id79" name="id79">Preferences</a><ul>
 262 <li><a class="reference" href="#general-startup-preferences" id="id80" name="id80">General Startup preferences</a><ul>
 263 <li><a class="reference" href="#id1" id="id81" name="id81">Startup</a></li>
 264 <li><a class="reference" href="#shutdown" id="id82" name="id82">Shutdown</a></li>
 265 <li><a class="reference" href="#paths" id="id83" name="id83">Paths</a></li>
 266 </ul>
 267 </li>
 268 <li><a class="reference" href="#general-miscellaneous-preferences" id="id84" name="id84">General Miscellaneous preferences</a><ul>
 269 <li><a class="reference" href="#miscellaneous" id="id85" name="id85">Miscellaneous</a></li>
 270 <li><a class="reference" href="#search" id="id86" name="id86">Search</a></li>
 271 <li><a class="reference" href="#projects" id="id87" name="id87">Projects</a></li>
 272 </ul>
 273 </li>
 274 <li><a class="reference" href="#interface-preferences" id="id88" name="id88">Interface preferences</a><ul>
 275 <li><a class="reference" href="#sidebar" id="id89" name="id89">Sidebar</a></li>
 276 <li><a class="reference" href="#fonts" id="id90" name="id90">Fonts</a></li>
 277 <li><a class="reference" href="#editor-tabs" id="id91" name="id91">Editor tabs</a></li>
 278 <li><a class="reference" href="#tab-positions" id="id92" name="id92">Tab positions</a></li>
 279 <li><a class="reference" href="#id2" id="id93" name="id93">Miscellaneous</a></li>
 280 </ul>
 281 </li>
 282 <li><a class="reference" href="#toolbar-preferences" id="id94" name="id94">Toolbar preferences</a><ul>
 283 <li><a class="reference" href="#toolbar" id="id95" name="id95">Toolbar</a></li>
 284 <li><a class="reference" href="#appearance" id="id96" name="id96">Appearance</a></li>
 285 </ul>
 286 </li>
 287 <li><a class="reference" href="#editor-features-preferences" id="id97" name="id97">Editor Features preferences</a><ul>
 288 <li><a class="reference" href="#features" id="id98" name="id98">Features</a></li>
 289 </ul>
 290 </li>
 291 <li><a class="reference" href="#editor-indentation-preferences" id="id99" name="id99">Editor Indentation preferences</a><ul>
 292 <li><a class="reference" href="#indentation-group" id="id100" name="id100">Indentation group</a></li>
 293 </ul>
 294 </li>
 295 <li><a class="reference" href="#editor-completions-preferences" id="id101" name="id101">Editor Completions preferences</a><ul>
 296 <li><a class="reference" href="#completions" id="id102" name="id102">Completions</a></li>
 297 <li><a class="reference" href="#auto-close-quotes-and-brackets" id="id103" name="id103">Auto-close quotes and brackets</a></li>
 298 </ul>
 299 </li>
 300 <li><a class="reference" href="#editor-display-preferences" id="id104" name="id104">Editor Display preferences</a><ul>
 301 <li><a class="reference" href="#display" id="id105" name="id105">Display</a></li>
 302 <li><a class="reference" href="#long-line-marker" id="id106" name="id106">Long line marker</a></li>
 303 <li><a class="reference" href="#virtual-spaces" id="id107" name="id107">Virtual spaces</a></li>
 304 </ul>
 305 </li>
 306 <li><a class="reference" href="#files-preferences" id="id108" name="id108">Files preferences</a><ul>
 307 <li><a class="reference" href="#new-files" id="id109" name="id109">New files</a></li>
 308 <li><a class="reference" href="#saving-files" id="id110" name="id110">Saving files</a></li>
 309 <li><a class="reference" href="#id3" id="id111" name="id111">Miscellaneous</a></li>
 310 </ul>
 311 </li>
 312 <li><a class="reference" href="#tools-preferences" id="id112" name="id112">Tools preferences</a><ul>
 313 <li><a class="reference" href="#tool-paths" id="id113" name="id113">Tool paths</a></li>
 314 <li><a class="reference" href="#commands" id="id114" name="id114">Commands</a></li>
 315 </ul>
 316 </li>
 317 <li><a class="reference" href="#template-preferences" id="id115" name="id115">Template preferences</a><ul>
 318 <li><a class="reference" href="#template-data" id="id116" name="id116">Template data</a></li>
 319 </ul>
 320 </li>
 321 <li><a class="reference" href="#keybinding-preferences" id="id117" name="id117">Keybinding preferences</a></li>
 322 <li><a class="reference" href="#printing-preferences" id="id118" name="id118">Printing preferences</a></li>
 323 <li><a class="reference" href="#terminal-vte-preferences" id="id119" name="id119">Terminal (VTE) preferences</a><ul>
 324 <li><a class="reference" href="#terminal-widget" id="id120" name="id120">Terminal widget</a></li>
 325 </ul>
 326 </li>
 327 </ul>
 328 </li>
 329 <li><a class="reference" href="#project-management" id="id121" name="id121">Project Management</a><ul>
 330 <li><a class="reference" href="#new-project" id="id122" name="id122">New Project</a></li>
 331 <li><a class="reference" href="#project-properties" id="id123" name="id123">Project Properties</a><ul>
 332 <li><a class="reference" href="#set-base-path-button" id="id124" name="id124">Set Base Path Button</a></li>
 333 </ul>
 334 </li>
 335 <li><a class="reference" href="#open-project" id="id125" name="id125">Open Project</a></li>
 336 <li><a class="reference" href="#close-project" id="id126" name="id126">Close Project</a></li>
 337 </ul>
 338 </li>
 339 <li><a class="reference" href="#build-menu" id="id127" name="id127">Build Menu</a><ul>
 340 <li><a class="reference" href="#indicators" id="id128" name="id128">Indicators</a></li>
 341 <li><a class="reference" href="#default-build-menu-items" id="id129" name="id129">Default Build Menu Items</a><ul>
 342 <li><a class="reference" href="#compile" id="id130" name="id130">Compile</a></li>
 343 <li><a class="reference" href="#build" id="id131" name="id131">Build</a></li>
 344 <li><a class="reference" href="#make" id="id132" name="id132">Make</a></li>
 345 <li><a class="reference" href="#make-custom-target" id="id133" name="id133">Make custom target</a></li>
 346 <li><a class="reference" href="#make-object" id="id134" name="id134">Make object</a></li>
 347 <li><a class="reference" href="#next-error" id="id135" name="id135">Next Error</a></li>
 348 <li><a class="reference" href="#previous-error" id="id136" name="id136">Previous Error</a></li>
 349 <li><a class="reference" href="#execute" id="id137" name="id137">Execute</a></li>
 350 <li><a class="reference" href="#stopping-running-processes" id="id138" name="id138">Stopping running processes</a><ul>
 351 <li><a class="reference" href="#terminal-emulators" id="id139" name="id139">Terminal emulators</a></li>
 352 </ul>
 353 </li>
 354 <li><a class="reference" href="#set-build-commands" id="id140" name="id140">Set Build Commands</a></li>
 355 </ul>
 356 </li>
 357 <li><a class="reference" href="#build-menu-configuration" id="id141" name="id141">Build Menu Configuration</a></li>
 358 <li><a class="reference" href="#build-menu-commands-dialog" id="id142" name="id142">Build Menu Commands Dialog</a><ul>
 359 <li><a class="reference" href="#substitutions-in-commands-and-working-directories" id="id143" name="id143">Substitutions in Commands and Working Directories</a></li>
 360 <li><a class="reference" href="#build-menu-keyboard-shortcuts" id="id144" name="id144">Build Menu Keyboard Shortcuts</a></li>
 361 <li><a class="reference" href="#configuration-files" id="id145" name="id145">Configuration Files</a></li>
 362 </ul>
 363 </li>
 364 </ul>
 365 </li>
 366 <li><a class="reference" href="#printing-support" id="id146" name="id146">Printing support</a></li>
 367 <li><a class="reference" href="#plugins" id="id147" name="id147">Plugins</a></li>
 368 <li><a class="reference" href="#keybindings" id="id148" name="id148">Keybindings</a><ul>
 369 <li><a class="reference" href="#switching-documents" id="id149" name="id149">Switching documents</a></li>
 370 <li><a class="reference" href="#configurable-keybindings" id="id150" name="id150">Configurable keybindings</a><ul>
 371 <li><a class="reference" href="#file-keybindings" id="id151" name="id151">File keybindings</a></li>
 372 <li><a class="reference" href="#editor-keybindings" id="id152" name="id152">Editor keybindings</a></li>
 373 <li><a class="reference" href="#clipboard-keybindings" id="id153" name="id153">Clipboard keybindings</a></li>
 374 <li><a class="reference" href="#select-keybindings" id="id154" name="id154">Select keybindings</a></li>
 375 <li><a class="reference" href="#insert-keybindings" id="id155" name="id155">Insert keybindings</a></li>
 376 <li><a class="reference" href="#format-keybindings" id="id156" name="id156">Format keybindings</a></li>
 377 <li><a class="reference" href="#settings-keybindings" id="id157" name="id157">Settings keybindings</a></li>
 378 <li><a class="reference" href="#search-keybindings" id="id158" name="id158">Search keybindings</a></li>
 379 <li><a class="reference" href="#go-to-keybindings" id="id159" name="id159">Go to keybindings</a></li>
 380 <li><a class="reference" href="#view-keybindings" id="id160" name="id160">View keybindings</a></li>
 381 <li><a class="reference" href="#focus-keybindings" id="id161" name="id161">Focus keybindings</a></li>
 382 <li><a class="reference" href="#notebook-tab-keybindings" id="id162" name="id162">Notebook tab keybindings</a></li>
 383 <li><a class="reference" href="#document-keybindings" id="id163" name="id163">Document keybindings</a></li>
 384 <li><a class="reference" href="#build-keybindings" id="id164" name="id164">Build keybindings</a></li>
 385 <li><a class="reference" href="#tools-keybindings" id="id165" name="id165">Tools keybindings</a></li>
 386 <li><a class="reference" href="#help-keybindings" id="id166" name="id166">Help keybindings</a></li>
 387 </ul>
 388 </li>
 389 </ul>
 390 </li>
 391 </ul>
 392 </li>
 393 <li><a class="reference" href="#id4" id="id167" name="id167">Configuration files</a><ul>
 394 <li><a class="reference" href="#tools-menu-items" id="id168" name="id168">Tools menu items</a></li>
 395 <li><a class="reference" href="#global-configuration-file" id="id169" name="id169">Global configuration file</a></li>
 396 <li><a class="reference" href="#filetype-definition-files" id="id170" name="id170">Filetype definition files</a><ul>
 397 <li><a class="reference" href="#custom-filetypes" id="id171" name="id171">Custom filetypes</a></li>
 398 <li><a class="reference" href="#system-files" id="id172" name="id172">System files</a></li>
 399 <li><a class="reference" href="#user-files" id="id173" name="id173">User files</a></li>
 400 <li><a class="reference" href="#format" id="id174" name="id174">Format</a><ul>
 401 <li><a class="reference" href="#styling-section" id="id175" name="id175">[styling] Section</a><ul>
 402 <li><a class="reference" href="#using-a-named-style" id="id176" name="id176">Using a named style</a></li>
 403 </ul>
 404 </li>
 405 <li><a class="reference" href="#keywords-section" id="id177" name="id177">[keywords] Section</a></li>
 406 <li><a class="reference" href="#lexer-properties-section" id="id178" name="id178">[lexer_properties] Section</a></li>
 407 <li><a class="reference" href="#settings-section" id="id179" name="id179">[settings] Section</a></li>
 408 <li><a class="reference" href="#build-settings-section" id="id180" name="id180">[build_settings] Section</a></li>
 409 </ul>
 410 </li>
 411 <li><a class="reference" href="#special-file-filetypes-common" id="id181" name="id181">Special file filetypes.common</a><ul>
 412 <li><a class="reference" href="#named-styles-section" id="id182" name="id182">[named_styles] Section</a></li>
 413 <li><a class="reference" href="#id5" id="id183" name="id183">[styling] Section</a></li>
 414 <li><a class="reference" href="#id6" id="id184" name="id184">[settings] Section</a></li>
 415 </ul>
 416 </li>
 417 </ul>
 418 </li>
 419 <li><a class="reference" href="#filetype-extensions" id="id185" name="id185">Filetype extensions</a></li>
 420 <li><a class="reference" href="#preferences-file-format" id="id186" name="id186">Preferences File Format</a><ul>
 421 <li><a class="reference" href="#hidden-preferences" id="id187" name="id187">Hidden preferences</a></li>
 422 <li><a class="reference" href="#build-menu-section" id="id188" name="id188">[build-menu] Section</a></li>
 423 </ul>
 424 </li>
 425 <li><a class="reference" href="#project-file-format" id="id189" name="id189">Project File Format</a><ul>
 426 <li><a class="reference" href="#build-menu-additions" id="id190" name="id190">[build-menu] Additions</a></li>
 427 </ul>
 428 </li>
 429 <li><a class="reference" href="#templates" id="id191" name="id191">Templates</a><ul>
 430 <li><a class="reference" href="#template-meta-data" id="id192" name="id192">Template meta data</a></li>
 431 <li><a class="reference" href="#file-templates" id="id193" name="id193">File templates</a><ul>
 432 <li><a class="reference" href="#custom-file-templates" id="id194" name="id194">Custom file templates</a></li>
 433 <li><a class="reference" href="#filetype-templates" id="id195" name="id195">Filetype templates</a></li>
 434 </ul>
 435 </li>
 436 <li><a class="reference" href="#customizing-templates" id="id196" name="id196">Customizing templates</a><ul>
 437 <li><a class="reference" href="#template-wildcards" id="id197" name="id197">Template wildcards</a><ul>
 438 <li><a class="reference" href="#special-command-wildcard" id="id198" name="id198">Special {command:} wildcard</a></li>
 439 </ul>
 440 </li>
 441 </ul>
 442 </li>
 443 </ul>
 444 </li>
 445 <li><a class="reference" href="#customizing-the-toolbar" id="id199" name="id199">Customizing the toolbar</a><ul>
 446 <li><a class="reference" href="#manually-editing-of-the-toolbar-layout" id="id200" name="id200">Manually editing of the toolbar layout</a></li>
 447 <li><a class="reference" href="#available-toolbar-elements" id="id201" name="id201">Available toolbar elements</a></li>
 448 </ul>
 449 </li>
 450 </ul>
 451 </li>
 452 <li><a class="reference" href="#plugin-documentation" id="id202" name="id202">Plugin documentation</a><ul>
 453 <li><a class="reference" href="#save-actions" id="id203" name="id203">Save Actions</a><ul>
 454 <li><a class="reference" href="#instant-save" id="id204" name="id204">Instant Save</a></li>
 455 <li><a class="reference" href="#backup-copy" id="id205" name="id205">Backup Copy</a></li>
 456 </ul>
 457 </li>
 458 </ul>
 459 </li>
 460 <li><a class="reference" href="#contributing-to-this-document" id="id206" name="id206">Contributing to this document</a></li>
 461 <li><a class="reference" href="#scintilla-keyboard-commands" id="id207" name="id207">Scintilla keyboard commands</a><ul>
 462 <li><a class="reference" href="#keyboard-commands" id="id208" name="id208">Keyboard commands</a></li>
 463 </ul>
 464 </li>
 465 <li><a class="reference" href="#tips-and-tricks" id="id209" name="id209">Tips and tricks</a><ul>
 466 <li><a class="reference" href="#document-notebook" id="id210" name="id210">Document notebook</a></li>
 467 <li><a class="reference" href="#editor" id="id211" name="id211">Editor</a></li>
 468 <li><a class="reference" href="#interface" id="id212" name="id212">Interface</a></li>
 469 <li><a class="reference" href="#gtk-related" id="id213" name="id213">GTK-related</a></li>
 470 </ul>
 471 </li>
 472 <li><a class="reference" href="#compile-time-options" id="id214" name="id214">Compile-time options</a><ul>
 473 <li><a class="reference" href="#src-geany-h" id="id215" name="id215">src/geany.h</a></li>
 474 <li><a class="reference" href="#project-h" id="id216" name="id216">project.h</a></li>
 475 <li><a class="reference" href="#editor-h" id="id217" name="id217">editor.h</a></li>
 476 <li><a class="reference" href="#keyfile-c" id="id218" name="id218">keyfile.c</a></li>
 477 <li><a class="reference" href="#build-c" id="id219" name="id219">build.c</a></li>
 478 </ul>
 479 </li>
 480 <li><a class="reference" href="#gnu-general-public-license" id="id220" name="id220">GNU General Public License</a></li>
 481 <li><a class="reference" href="#license-for-scintilla-and-scite" id="id221" name="id221">License for Scintilla and SciTE</a></li>
 482 </ul>
 483 </div>
 484 <div class="section">
 485 <h1><a class="toc-backref" href="#id8" id="introduction" name="introduction">Introduction</a></h1>
 486 <div class="section">
 487 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id9" id="about-geany" name="about-geany">About Geany</a></h2>
 488 <p>Geany is a small and lightweight Integrated Development Environment. It
 489 was developed to provide a small and fast IDE, which has only a few
 490 dependencies on other packages. Another goal was to be as independent
 491 as possible from a particular Desktop Environment like KDE or GNOME -
 492 Geany only requires the GTK2 runtime libraries.</p>
 493 <p>Some basic features of Geany:</p>
 494 <ul class="simple">
 495 <li>Syntax highlighting</li>
 496 <li>Code folding</li>
 497 <li>Autocompletion of symbols/words</li>
 498 <li>Construct completion/snippets</li>
 499 <li>Auto-closing of XML and HTML tags</li>
 500 <li>Calltips</li>
 501 <li>Many supported filetypes including C, Java, PHP, HTML, Python, Perl,
 502 Pascal, and others</li>
 503 <li>Symbol lists</li>
 504 <li>Code navigation</li>
 505 <li>Build system to compile and execute your code</li>
 506 <li>Simple project management</li>
 507 <li>Plugin interface</li>
 508 </ul>
 509 </div>
 510 <div class="section">
 511 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id10" id="where-to-get-it" name="where-to-get-it">Where to get it</a></h2>
 512 <p>You can obtain Geany from <a class="reference" href="http://www.geany.org/">http://www.geany.org/</a> or perhaps also from
 513 your distribution. For a list of available packages, please see
 514 <a class="reference" href="http://www.geany.org/Download/ThirdPartyPackages">http://www.geany.org/Download/ThirdPartyPackages</a>.</p>
 515 </div>
 516 <div class="section">
 517 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id11" id="license" name="license">License</a></h2>
 518 <p>Geany is distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License
 519 as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
 520 the License, or (at your option) any later version. A copy of this
 521 license can be found in the file COPYING included with the source
 522 code of this program and in the chapter, <a class="reference" href="#gnu-general-public-license">GNU General Public License</a>.</p>
 523 <p>The included Scintilla library (found in the subdirectory
 524 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">scintilla/</span></tt>) has its own license, which can be found in the chapter,
 525 <a class="reference" href="#license-for-scintilla-and-scite">License for Scintilla and SciTE</a>.</p>
 526 </div>
 527 <div class="section">
 528 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id12" id="about-this-document" name="about-this-document">About this document</a></h2>
 529 <p>This documentation is available in HTML and text formats.
 530 The latest version can always be found at <a class="reference" href="http://www.geany.org/">http://www.geany.org/</a>.</p>
 531 <p>If you want to contribute to it, see <a class="reference" href="#contributing-to-this-document">Contributing to this document</a>.</p>
 532 </div>
 533 </div>
 534 <div class="section">
 535 <h1><a class="toc-backref" href="#id13" id="installation" name="installation">Installation</a></h1>
 536 <div class="section">
 537 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id14" id="requirements" name="requirements">Requirements</a></h2>
 538 <p>You will need the GTK (&gt;= 2.8.0) libraries and their dependencies
 539 (Pango, GLib and ATK). Your distro should provide packages for these,
 540 usually installed by default. For Windows, you can download an installer
 541 from the website which bundles these libraries.</p>
 542 </div>
 543 <div class="section">
 544 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id15" id="binary-packages" name="binary-packages">Binary packages</a></h2>
 545 <p>There are many binary packages available. For an up-to-date but maybe
 546 incomplete list see <a class="reference" href="http://www.geany.org/Download/ThirdPartyPackages">http://www.geany.org/Download/ThirdPartyPackages</a>.</p>
 547 </div>
 548 <div class="section">
 549 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id16" id="source-compilation" name="source-compilation">Source compilation</a></h2>
 550 <p>Compiling Geany is quite easy.
 551 To do so, you need the GTK (&gt;= 2.8.0) libraries and header files.
 552 You also need the Pango, GLib and ATK libraries and header files.
 553 All these files are available at <a class="reference" href="http://www.gtk.org">http://www.gtk.org</a>, but very often
 554 your distro will provide development packages to save the trouble of
 555 building these yourself.</p>
 556 <p>Furthermore you need, of course, a C and C++ compiler. The GNU versions
 557 of these tools are recommended.</p>
 558 <div class="section">
 559 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id17" id="autotools-based-build-system" name="autotools-based-build-system">Autotools based build system</a></h3>
 560 <p>The Autotools based build system is very mature and has been well tested.
 561 To use it, you just need the Make tool, preferably GNU Make.</p>
 562 <p>Then run the following commands:</p>
 563 <pre class="literal-block">
 564 $ ./configure
 565 $ make
 566 </pre>
 567 <p>Then as root:</p>
 568 <pre class="literal-block">
 569 % make install
 570 </pre>
 571 </div>
 572 <div class="section">
 573 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id18" id="waf-based-build-system" name="waf-based-build-system">Waf based build system</a></h3>
 574 <p>The Waf build system is still quite young and under heavy development but already in a
 575 usable state. In contrast to the Autotools system, Waf needs Python. So before using Waf, you need
 576 to install Python on your system.
 577 The advantage of the Waf build system over the Autotools based build system is that the whole
 578 build process might be a bit faster. Especially when you use the Waf
 579 cache feature for repetitive builds (e.g. when changing only a few source files
 580 to test something) will become much faster since Waf will cache and re-use the
 581 unchanged built files and only compile the changed code again. See <a class="reference" href="#waf-cache">Waf Cache</a> for details.
 582 To build Geany with Waf as run:</p>
 583 <pre class="literal-block">
 584 $ ./waf configure
 585 $ ./waf build
 586 </pre>
 587 <p>Then as root:</p>
 588 <pre class="literal-block">
 589 % ./waf install
 590 </pre>
 591 <div class="section">
 592 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id19" id="waf-cache" name="waf-cache">Waf Cache</a></h4>
 593 <p>The Waf build system has a nice and interesting feature which can help  to avoid
 594 a lot of unnecessary rebuilding of unchanged code. This often happens when developing new features
 595 or trying to debug something in Geany.
 596 Waf is able to store and retrieve the object files from a cache. This cache is declared
 597 using the environment variable <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">WAFCACHE</span></tt>.
 598 A possible location of the cache directory could be <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/.cache/waf</span></tt>. In order to make use of
 599 this, you first need to create this directory:</p>
 600 <pre class="literal-block">
 601 $ mkdir -p ~/.cache/waf
 602 </pre>
 603 <p>then add the environment variable to your shell configuration (the following example is for
 604 Bash and should be adjusted to your used shell):</p>
 605 <pre class="literal-block">
 606 export WAFCACHE=/home/username/.cache/waf
 607 </pre>
 608 <p>Remember to replace <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">username</span></tt> with your actual username.</p>
 609 <p>More information about the Waf cache feature are available at
 610 <a class="reference" href="http://code.google.com/p/waf/wiki/CacheObjectFiles">http://code.google.com/p/waf/wiki/CacheObjectFiles</a>.</p>
 611 <div class="section">
 612 <h5><a class="toc-backref" href="#id20" id="cleaning-the-cache" name="cleaning-the-cache">Cleaning the Cache</a></h5>
 613 <p>You should be careful about the size of the cache directory as it may
 614 grow rapidly over time.
 615 Waf doesn't do any cleaning or other house-keeping of the cache yet, so you need to keep it
 616 clean by yourself.
 617 An easy way to keep it clean is to run the following command regularly to remove old
 618 cached files:</p>
 619 <pre class="literal-block">
 620 $ find /home/username/.cache/waf -mtime +14 -exec rm {} \;
 621 </pre>
 622 <p>This will delete all files in the cache directory which are older than 14 days.</p>
 623 <p>For details about the <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">find</span></tt> command and its options, check its manual page.</p>
 624 </div>
 625 </div>
 626 </div>
 627 <div class="section">
 628 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id21" id="custom-installation" name="custom-installation">Custom installation</a></h3>
 629 <p>The configure script supports several common options, for a detailed
 630 list, type:</p>
 631 <pre class="literal-block">
 632 $ ./configure --help
 633 </pre>
 634 <dl class="docutils">
 635 <dt>or::</dt>
 636 <dd>$ ./waf --help</dd>
 637 </dl>
 638 <p>(depending on which build system you use).</p>
 639 <p>You may also want to read the INSTALL file for advanced installation
 640 options.</p>
 641 <ul class="simple">
 642 <li>See also <a class="reference" href="#compile-time-options">Compile-time options</a>.</li>
 643 </ul>
 644 </div>
 645 <div class="section">
 646 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id22" id="dynamic-linking-loader-support-and-vte" name="dynamic-linking-loader-support-and-vte">Dynamic linking loader support and VTE</a></h3>
 647 <p>In the case that your system lacks dynamic linking loader support, you
 648 probably want to pass the option <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">--disable-vte</span></tt> to the <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">configure</span></tt>
 649 script. This prevents compiling Geany with dynamic linking loader
 650 support for automatically loading <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">libvte.so.4</span></tt> if available.</p>
 651 </div>
 652 <div class="section">
 653 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id23" id="build-problems" name="build-problems">Build problems</a></h3>
 654 <p>If there are any errors during compilation, check your build
 655 environment and try to find the error, otherwise contact the mailing
 656 list or one the authors. Sometimes you might need to ask for specific
 657 help from your distribution.</p>
 658 </div>
 659 </div>
 660 <div class="section">
 661 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id24" id="installation-prefix" name="installation-prefix">Installation prefix</a></h2>
 662 <p>If you want to edit any of Geany's system configuration files after
 663 installation you will need to know the installation prefix.  Usually this
 664 is not necessary as you can just use per user configuration files and
 665 you will not need root permissions.</p>
 666 <p>Use the <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">--print-prefix</span></tt> option to Geany to check - see <a class="reference" href="#command-line-options">Command line
 667 options</a>. The first path is the prefix.</p>
 668 <p>This is commonly <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">/usr</span></tt> if you installed from a binary package, or
 669 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">/usr/local</span></tt> if you build from source.</p>
 670 </div>
 671 </div>
 672 <div class="section">
 673 <h1><a class="toc-backref" href="#id25" id="usage" name="usage">Usage</a></h1>
 674 <div class="section">
 675 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id26" id="getting-started" name="getting-started">Getting started</a></h2>
 676 <p>You can start Geany in the following ways:</p>
 677 <ul>
 678 <li><p class="first">From the Desktop Environment menu:</p>
 679 <p>Choose in your application menu of your used Desktop Environment:
 680 Development --&gt; Geany.</p>
 681 </li>
 682 <li><p class="first">From the command line:</p>
 683 <p>To start Geany from a command line, type the following and press
 684 Return:</p>
 685 <pre class="literal-block">
 686 % geany
 687 </pre>
 688 </li>
 689 </ul>
 690 </div>
 691 <div class="section">
 692 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id27" id="the-geany-workspace" name="the-geany-workspace">The Geany workspace</a></h2>
 693 <p>The Geany window is shown in the following figure:</p>
 694 <img alt="./images/main_window.png" src="./images/main_window.png" />
 695 <p>The workspace has the following parts:</p>
 696 <ul class="simple">
 697 <li>The menu.</li>
 698 <li>An optional toolbar.</li>
 699 <li>An optional sidebar that can show the following tabs:<ul>
 700 <li>Documents - A document list, and</li>
 701 <li>Symbols - A list of symbols in your code.</li>
 702 </ul>
 703 </li>
 704 <li>The main editor window.</li>
 705 <li>An optional message window which can show the following tabs:<ul>
 706 <li>Status - A list of status messages.</li>
 707 <li>Compiler - The output of compiling or building programs.</li>
 708 <li>Messages - Results of 'Find Usage', 'Find Usage' 'Find in Files' and other actions</li>
 709 <li>Scribble - A text scratchpad for any use.</li>
 710 <li>Terminal - An optional terminal window.</li>
 711 </ul>
 712 </li>
 713 <li>A status bar</li>
 714 </ul>
 715 <p>Additional tabs may be added to the sidebar and message window by plugins.</p>
 716 <p>The position of the tabs can be selected in the interface preferences.</p>
 717 <p>The sizes of the sidebar and message window can be adjusted by
 718 dragging the dividers.</p>
 719 </div>
 720 <div class="section">
 721 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id28" id="command-line-options" name="command-line-options">Command line options</a></h2>
 722 <table border="1" class="docutils">
 723 <colgroup>
 724 <col width="9%" />
 725 <col width="18%" />
 726 <col width="72%" />
 727 </colgroup>
 728 <thead valign="bottom">
 729 <tr><th class="head">Short option</th>
 730 <th class="head">Long option</th>
 731 <th class="head">Function</th>
 732 </tr>
 733 </thead>
 734 <tbody valign="top">
 735 <tr><td><em>none</em></td>
 736 <td>+number</td>
 737 <td>Set initial line number for the first opened file
 738 (same as --line, do not put a space between the + sign
 739 and the number). E.g. &quot;geany +7 foo.bar&quot; will open the
 740 file foo.bar and place the cursor in line 7.</td>
 741 </tr>
 742 <tr><td><em>none</em></td>
 743 <td>--column</td>
 744 <td>Set initial column number for the first opened file.</td>
 745 </tr>
 746 <tr><td>-c dir_name</td>
 747 <td>--config=directory_name</td>
 748 <td>Use an alternate configuration directory. The default
 749 configuration directory is <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/.config/geany/</span></tt> and that
 750 is where <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">geany.conf</span></tt> and other configuration files
 751 reside.</td>
 752 </tr>
 753 <tr><td><em>none</em></td>
 754 <td>--ft-names</td>
 755 <td>Print a list of Geany's internal filetype names (useful
 756 for snippets configuration).</td>
 757 </tr>
 758 <tr><td>-g</td>
 759 <td>--generate-tags</td>
 760 <td>Generate a global tags file (see
 761 <a class="reference" href="#generating-a-global-tags-file">Generating a global tags file</a>).</td>
 762 </tr>
 763 <tr><td>-P</td>
 764 <td>--no-preprocessing</td>
 765 <td>Don't preprocess C/C++ files when generating tags.</td>
 766 </tr>
 767 <tr><td>-i</td>
 768 <td>--new-instance</td>
 769 <td>Do not open files in a running instance, force opening
 770 a new instance. Only available if Geany was compiled
 771 with support for Sockets.</td>
 772 </tr>
 773 <tr><td>-l</td>
 774 <td>--line</td>
 775 <td>Set initial line number for the first opened file.</td>
 776 </tr>
 777 <tr><td><em>none</em></td>
 778 <td>--list-documents</td>
 779 <td>Return a list of open documents in a running Geany
 780 instance.
 781 This can be used to read the currently opened documents in
 782 Geany from an external script or tool. The returned list
 783 is separated by newlines (LF) and consists of the full,
 784 UTF-8 encoded filenames of the documents.
 785 Only available if Geany was compiled with support for
 786 Sockets.</td>
 787 </tr>
 788 <tr><td>-m</td>
 789 <td>--no-msgwin</td>
 790 <td>Do not show the message window. Use this option if you
 791 do not need compiler messages or VTE support.</td>
 792 </tr>
 793 <tr><td>-n</td>
 794 <td>--no-ctags</td>
 795 <td>Do not load symbol completion and call tip data. Use this
 796 option if you do not want to use them.</td>
 797 </tr>
 798 <tr><td>-p</td>
 799 <td>--no-plugins</td>
 800 <td>Do not load plugins or plugin support.</td>
 801 </tr>
 802 <tr><td><em>none</em></td>
 803 <td>--print-prefix</td>
 804 <td>Print installation prefix, the data directory, the lib
 805 directory and the locale directory (in this order) to
 806 stdout, one line each. This is mainly intended for plugin
 807 authors to detect installation paths.</td>
 808 </tr>
 809 <tr><td>-s</td>
 810 <td>--no-session</td>
 811 <td>Do not load the previous session's files.</td>
 812 </tr>
 813 <tr><td>-t</td>
 814 <td>--no-terminal</td>
 815 <td>Do not load terminal support. Use this option if you do
 816 not want to load the virtual terminal emulator widget
 817 at startup. If you do not have <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">libvte.so.4</span></tt> installed,
 818 then terminal-support is automatically disabled. Only
 819 available if Geany was compiled with support for VTE.</td>
 820 </tr>
 821 <tr><td><em>none</em></td>
 822 <td>--socket-file</td>
 823 <td><p class="first">Use this socket filename for communication with a
 824 running Geany instance. This can be used with the following
 825 command to execute Geany on the current workspace:</p>
 826 <pre class="last literal-block">
 827 geany --socket-file=/tmp/geany-sock-$(xprop -root _NET_CURRENT_DESKTOP | awk '{print $3}')
 828 </pre>
 829 </td>
 830 </tr>
 831 <tr><td><em>none</em></td>
 832 <td>--vte-lib</td>
 833 <td>Specify explicitly the path including filename or only
 834 the filename to the VTE library, e.g.
 835 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">/usr/lib/libvte.so</span></tt> or <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">libvte.so</span></tt>. This option is
 836 only needed when the auto-detection does not work. Only
 837 available if Geany was compiled with support for VTE.</td>
 838 </tr>
 839 <tr><td>-v</td>
 840 <td>--verbose</td>
 841 <td>Be verbose (print useful status messages).</td>
 842 </tr>
 843 <tr><td>-V</td>
 844 <td>--version</td>
 845 <td>Show version information and exit.</td>
 846 </tr>
 847 <tr><td>-?</td>
 848 <td>--help</td>
 849 <td>Show help information and exit.</td>
 850 </tr>
 851 <tr><td><em>none</em></td>
 852 <td>[files ...]</td>
 853 <td><p class="first">Open all given files at startup. This option causes
 854 Geany to ignore loading stored files from the last
 855 session (if enabled).
 856 Geany also recognizes line and column information when
 857 appended to the filename with colons, e.g.
 858 &quot;geany foo.bar:10:5&quot; will open the file foo.bar and
 859 place the cursor in line 10 at column 5.</p>
 860 <p class="last">Projects can also be opened but a project file (*.geany)
 861 must be the first non-option argument. All additionally
 862 given files are ignored.</p>
 863 </td>
 864 </tr>
 865 </tbody>
 866 </table>
 867 <p>You can also pass line number and column number information, e.g.:</p>
 868 <pre class="literal-block">
 869 geany some_file.foo:55:4
 870 </pre>
 871 <p>Geany supports all generic GTK options, a list is available on the
 872 help screen.</p>
 873 </div>
 874 <div class="section">
 875 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id29" id="general" name="general">General</a></h2>
 876 <div class="section">
 877 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id30" id="startup" name="startup">Startup</a></h3>
 878 <p>At startup, Geany loads all files from the last time Geany was
 879 launched. You can disable this feature in the preferences dialog
 880 (see <a class="reference" href="#general-startup-preferences">General Startup preferences</a>). If you specify some
 881 files on the command line, only these files will be opened, but you
 882 can find the files from the last session in the file menu under the
 883 &quot;Recent files&quot; item. By default this contains the last 10 recently
 884 opened files. You can change the number of recently opened files in
 885 the preferences dialog.</p>
 886 <p>You can start several instances of Geany, but only the first will
 887 load files from the last session. To run a second instance of Geany,
 888 do not specify any filenames on the command-line, or disable opening
 889 files in a running instance using the appropriate command line option.</p>
 890 </div>
 891 <div class="section">
 892 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id31" id="opening-files-from-the-command-line-in-a-running-instance" name="opening-files-from-the-command-line-in-a-running-instance">Opening files from the command-line in a running instance</a></h3>
 893 <p>Geany detects if there is an an instance of itself already running and opens files
 894 from the command-line in that instance. So, Geany can
 895 be used to view and edit files by opening them from other programs
 896 such as a file manager.</p>
 897 <p>You can also pass line number and column number information, e.g.:</p>
 898 <pre class="literal-block">
 899 geany some_file.foo:55:4
 900 </pre>
 901 <p>This would open the file <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">some_file.foo</span></tt> with the cursor on line 55,
 902 column 4.</p>
 903 <p>If you do not like this for some reason, you can disable using the first
 904 instance by using the appropriate command line option -- see the section
 905 called <a class="reference" href="#command-line-options">Command line options</a>.</p>
 906 </div>
 907 <div class="section">
 908 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id32" id="virtual-terminal-emulator-widget-vte" name="virtual-terminal-emulator-widget-vte">Virtual terminal emulator widget (VTE)</a></h3>
 909 <p>If you have installed <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">libvte.so</span></tt> on your system, it is loaded
 910 automatically by Geany, and you will have a terminal widget in the
 911 notebook at the bottom.</p>
 912 <p>If Geany cannot find any <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">libvte.so</span></tt> at startup, the terminal widget
 913 will not be loaded. So there is no need to install the package containing
 914 this file in order to run Geany. Additionally, you can disable the use
 915 of the terminal widget by command line option, for more information
 916 see the section called <a class="reference" href="#command-line-options">Command line options</a>.</p>
 917 <p>You can use this terminal (from now on called VTE) much as you would
 918 a terminal program like xterm. There is basic clipboard support. You
 919 can paste the contents of the clipboard by pressing the right mouse
 920 button to open the popup menu, and choosing Paste. To copy text from
 921 the VTE, just select the desired text and then press the right mouse
 922 button and choose Copy from the popup menu. On systems running the
 923 X Window System you can paste the last selected text by pressing the
 924 middle mouse button in the VTE (on 2-button mice, the middle button
 925 can often be simulated by pressing both mouse buttons together).</p>
 926 <p>In the preferences dialog you can specify a shell which should be
 927 started in the VTE. To make the specified shell a login shell just
 928 use the appropriate command line options for the shell. These options
 929 should be found in the manual page of the shell. For zsh and bash
 930 you can use the argument <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">--login</span></tt>.</p>
 931 <div class="note">
 932 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
 933 <p class="last">Geany tries to load <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">libvte.so</span></tt>. If this fails, it tries to load
 934 some other filenames. If this fails too, you should check whether you
 935 installed libvte correctly. Again note, Geany will run without this
 936 library.</p>
 937 </div>
 938 <p>It could be, that the library is called something else than
 939 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">libvte.so</span></tt> (e.g. on FreeBSD 6.0 it is called <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">libvte.so.8</span></tt>). If so
 940 please set a link to the correct file (as root):</p>
 941 <pre class="literal-block">
 942 # ln -s /usr/lib/libvte.so.X /usr/lib/libvte.so
 943 </pre>
 944 <p>Obviously, you have to adjust the paths and set X to the number of your
 945 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">libvte.so</span></tt>.</p>
 946 <p>You can also specify the filename of the VTE library to use on the command
 947 line (see the section called <a class="reference" href="#command-line-options">Command line options</a>) or at compile time
 948 by specifying the command line option <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">--with-vte-module-path</span></tt> to
 949 ./configure.</p>
 950 </div>
 951 <div class="section">
 952 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id33" id="defining-own-widget-styles-using-gtkrc-2-0" name="defining-own-widget-styles-using-gtkrc-2-0">Defining own widget styles using .gtkrc-2.0</a></h3>
 953 <p>You can define your widget style for many of Geany's GUI parts. To
 954 do this, just edit your <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">.gtkrc-2.0</span></tt> (usually found in your home
 955 directory on UNIX-like systems and in the etc subdirectory of your
 956 Geany installation on Windows).</p>
 957 <p>To have a defined style used by Geany you must assign it to
 958 at least one of Geany's widgets. For example use the following line:</p>
 959 <pre class="literal-block">
 960 widget &quot;Geany*&quot; style &quot;geanyStyle&quot;
 961 </pre>
 962 <p>This would assign your style &quot;geany_style&quot; to all Geany
 963 widgets. You can also assign styles only to specific widgets. At the
 964 moment you can use the following widgets:</p>
 965 <ul class="simple">
 966 <li>GeanyMainWindow</li>
 967 <li>GeanyEditMenu</li>
 968 <li>GeanyToolbarMenu</li>
 969 <li>GeanyDialog</li>
 970 <li>GeanyDialogPrefs</li>
 971 <li>GeanyDialogProject</li>
 972 <li>GeanyDialogSearch</li>
 973 <li>GeanyMenubar</li>
 974 <li>GeanyToolbar</li>
 975 </ul>
 976 <p>An example of a simple <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">.gtkrc-2.0</span></tt>:</p>
 977 <pre class="literal-block">
 978 style &quot;geanyStyle&quot;
 979 {
 980     font_name=&quot;Sans 12&quot;
 981 }
 982 widget &quot;GeanyMainWindow&quot; style &quot;geanyStyle&quot;
 983
 984 style &quot;geanyStyle&quot;
 985 {
 986     font_name=&quot;Sans 10&quot;
 987 }
 988 widget &quot;GeanyPrefsDialog&quot; style &quot;geanyStyle&quot;
 989 </pre>
 990 </div>
 991 </div>
 992 <div class="section">
 993 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id34" id="documents" name="documents">Documents</a></h2>
 994 <div class="section">
 995 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id35" id="switching-between-documents" name="switching-between-documents">Switching between documents</a></h3>
 996 <p>The documents list and the editor tabs are two different ways
 997 to switch between documents using the mouse. When you hit the key
 998 combination to move between tabs, the order is determined by the tab
 999 order. Its is not alphabetical as shown in the documents list
1000 (regardless of whether or not editor tabs are visible).</p>
1001 <p>The tabs can be positioned at the top, bottom, left, or right of the
1002 main editing window, by a selection in the interface preferences.</p>
1003 <p>See the <a class="reference" href="#notebook-tab-keybindings">Notebook tab keybindings</a> section for useful
1004 shortcuts including for Most-Recently-Used document switching.</p>
1005 </div>
1006 </div>
1007 <div class="section">
1008 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id36" id="character-sets-and-unicode-byte-order-mark-bom" name="character-sets-and-unicode-byte-order-mark-bom">Character sets and Unicode Byte-Order-Mark (BOM)</a></h2>
1009 <div class="section">
1010 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id37" id="using-character-sets" name="using-character-sets">Using character sets</a></h3>
1011 <p>Geany provides support for detecting and converting character sets. So
1012 you can open and save files in different character sets, and even
1013 convert a file from one character set to another. To do this,
1014 Geany uses the character conversion capabilities of the GLib library.</p>
1015 <p>Only text files are supported, i.e. opening files which contain
1016 NULL-bytes may fail. Geany will try to open the file anyway but it is
1017 likely that the file will be truncated because it can only be read up
1018 to the first occurrence of a NULL-byte. All characters after this
1019 position are lost and are not written when you save the file.</p>
1020 <p>Geany tries to detect the encoding of a file while opening it, but
1021 auto-detecting the encoding of a file is not easy and sometimes an
1022 encoding might not be detected correctly. In this case you have to
1023 set the encoding of the file manually in order to display it
1024 correctly. You can this in the file open dialog by selecting an
1025 encoding in the drop down box or by reloading the file with the
1026 file menu item &quot;Reload as&quot;. The auto-detection works well for most
1027 encodings but there are also some encodings where it is known that
1028 auto-detection has problems.</p>
1029 <p>There are different ways to set different encodings in Geany:</p>
1030 <ul>
1031 <li><p class="first">Using the file open dialog</p>
1032 <p>This opens the file with the encoding specified in the encoding drop
1033 down box. If the encoding is set to &quot;Detect from file&quot; auto-detection
1034 will be used. If the encoding is set to &quot;Without encoding (None)&quot; the
1035 file will be opened without any character conversion and Geany will
1036 not try to auto-detect the encoding (see below for more information).</p>
1037 </li>
1038 <li><p class="first">Using the &quot;Reload as&quot; menu item</p>
1039 <p>This item reloads the current file with the specified encoding. It can
1040 help if you opened a file and found out that the wrong encoding was used.</p>
1041 </li>
1042 <li><p class="first">Using the &quot;Set encoding&quot; menu item</p>
1043 <p>Contrary to the above two options, this will not change or reload
1044 the current file unless you save it. It is useful when you want to
1045 change the encoding of the file.</p>
1046 </li>
1047 <li><p class="first">Specifying the encoding in the file itself</p>
1048 <p>As mentioned above, auto-detecting the encoding of a file may fail on
1049 some encodings. If you know that Geany doesn't open a certain file,
1050 you can add the specification line, described in the next section,
1051 to the beginning of the file to force Geany to use a specific
1052 encoding when opening the file.</p>
1053 </li>
1054 </ul>
1055 </div>
1056 <div class="section">
1057 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id38" id="in-file-encoding-specification" name="in-file-encoding-specification">In-file encoding specification</a></h3>
1058 <p>Geany detects meta tags of HTML files which contain charset information
1059 like:</p>
1060 <pre class="literal-block">
1061 &lt;meta http-equiv=&quot;content-type&quot; content=&quot;text/html; charset=ISO-8859-15&quot; /&gt;
1062 </pre>
1063 <p>and the specified charset is used when opening the file. This is useful if the
1064 encoding of the file cannot be detected properly.
1065 For non-HTML files you can also define a line like:</p>
1066 <pre class="literal-block">
1067 /* geany_encoding=ISO-8859-15 */
1068 </pre>
1069 <p>or:</p>
1070 <pre class="literal-block">
1071 # geany_encoding=ISO-8859-15 #
1072 </pre>
1073 <p>to force an encoding to be used. The #, /* and */ are examples
1074 of filetype-specific comment characters. It doesn't matter which
1075 characters are around the string &quot; geany_encoding=ISO-8859-15 &quot; as long
1076 as there is at least one whitespace character before and after this
1077 string. Whitespace characters are in this case a space or tab character.
1078 An example to use this could be you have a file with ISO-8859-15
1079 encoding but Geany constantly detects the file encoding as ISO-8859-1.
1080 Then you simply add such a line to the file and Geany will open it
1081 correctly the next time.</p>
1082 <p>Since Geany 0.15 you can also use lines which match the
1083 regular expression used to find the encoding string:
1084 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">coding[\t</span> <span class="pre">]*[:=][\t</span> <span class="pre">]*([a-z0-9-]+)[\t</span> <span class="pre">]*</span></tt></p>
1085 <div class="note">
1086 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
1087 <p class="last">These specifications must be in the first 512 bytes of the file.
1088 Anything after the first 512 bytes will not be recognized.</p>
1089 </div>
1090 <p>Some examples are:</p>
1091 <pre class="literal-block">
1092 # encoding = ISO-8859-15
1093 </pre>
1094 <p>or:</p>
1095 <pre class="literal-block">
1096 # coding: ISO-8859-15
1097 </pre>
1098 </div>
1099 <div class="section">
1100 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id39" id="special-encoding-none" name="special-encoding-none">Special encoding &quot;None&quot;</a></h3>
1101 <p>There is a special encoding &quot;None&quot; which uses no
1102 encoding. It is useful when you know that Geany cannot auto-detect
1103 the encoding of a file and it is not displayed correctly. Especially
1104 when the file contains NULL-bytes this can be useful to skip auto
1105 detection and open the file properly at least until the occurrence
1106 of the first NULL-byte. Using this encoding opens the file as it is
1107 without any character conversion.</p>
1108 </div>
1109 <div class="section">
1110 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id40" id="unicode-byte-order-mark-bom" name="unicode-byte-order-mark-bom">Unicode Byte-Order-Mark (BOM)</a></h3>
1111 <p>Furthermore, Geany detects a Unicode Byte Order Mark (see
1112 <a class="reference" href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Byte_Order_Mark">http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Byte_Order_Mark</a> for details). Of course,
1113 this feature is only available if the opened file is in a Unicode
1114 encoding. The Byte Order Mark helps to detect the encoding of a file,
1115 e.g. whether it is UTF-16LE or UTF-16BE and so on. On Unix-like systems
1116 using a Byte Order Mark could cause some problems for programs not
1117 expecting it, e.g. the compiler gcc stops
1118 with stray errors, PHP does not parse a script containing a BOM and
1119 script files starting with a she-bang maybe cannot be started. In the
1120 status bar you can easily see whether the file starts with a BOM or
1121 not.</p>
1122 <p>If you want to set a BOM for a file or if you want to remove it
1123 from a file, just use the document menu and toggle the checkbox.</p>
1124 <div class="note">
1125 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
1126 <p class="last">If you are unsure what a BOM is or if you do not understand where
1127 to use it, then it is probably not important for you and you can
1128 safely ignore it.</p>
1129 </div>
1130 </div>
1131 </div>
1132 <div class="section">
1133 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id41" id="editing" name="editing">Editing</a></h2>
1134 <div class="section">
1135 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id42" id="folding" name="folding">Folding</a></h3>
1136 <p>Geany provides basic code folding support. Folding means the ability to
1137 show and hide parts of the text in the current file. You can hide
1138 unimportant code sections and concentrate on the parts you are working on
1139 and later you can show hidden sections again. In the editor window there is
1140 a small grey margin on the left side with [+] and [-] symbols which
1141 show hidden parts and hide parts of the file respectively. By
1142 clicking on these icons you can simply show and hide sections which are
1143 marked by vertical lines within this margin. For many filetypes nested
1144 folding is supported, so there may be several fold points within other
1145 fold points.</p>
1146 <div class="note">
1147 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
1148 <p class="last">You can customize the folding icon and line styles - see the
1149 filetypes.common <a class="reference" href="#folding-settings">Folding Settings</a>.</p>
1150 </div>
1151 <p>If you don't like it or don't need it at all, you can simply disable
1152 folding support completely in the preferences dialog.</p>
1153 <p>The folding behaviour can be changed with the &quot;Fold/Unfold all children of
1154 a fold point&quot; option in the preference dialog. If activated, Geany will
1155 unfold all nested fold points below the current one if they are already
1156 folded (when clicking on a [+] symbol).
1157 When clicking on a [-] symbol, Geany will fold all nested fold points
1158 below the current one if they are unfolded.</p>
1159 <p>This option can be inverted by pressing the Shift
1160 key while clicking on a fold symbol. That means, if the &quot;Fold/Unfold all
1161 children of a fold point&quot; option is enabled, pressing Shift will disable
1162 it for this click and vice versa.</p>
1163 </div>
1164 <div class="section">
1165 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id43" id="column-mode-editing-rectangular-selections" name="column-mode-editing-rectangular-selections">Column mode editing (rectangular selections)</a></h3>
1166 <p>There is basic support for column mode editing. To use it, create a
1167 rectangular selection by holding down the Control and Shift keys
1168 (or Control and Alt if it doesn't work) while
1169 selecting some text. It is also possible to create a zero-column selection.
1170 Once a rectangular selection exists you can start editing the text within
1171 this selection and the modifications will be done for every line in the
1172 selection.</p>
1173 </div>
1174 <div class="section">
1175 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id44" id="drag-and-drop-of-text" name="drag-and-drop-of-text">Drag and drop of text</a></h3>
1176 <p>If you drag selected text in the editor widget of Geany the text is
1177 moved to the position where the mouse pointer is when releasing the
1178 mouse button. Holding Control when releasing the mouse button will
1179 copy the text instead. This behaviour was changed in Geany 0.11 -
1180 before the selected text was copied to the new position.</p>
1181 </div>
1182 <div class="section">
1183 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id45" id="indentation" name="indentation">Indentation</a></h3>
1184 <p>Geany allows each document to indent either with a tab character or
1185 multiple spaces. The default indent mode is set in the <a class="reference" href="#editor-features-preferences">Editor Features
1186 preferences</a> (see the link for more information). But
1187 this can be overridden using either the <em>Document-&gt;Indent Type</em> menu,
1188 or by using the <em>Detect from file</em> indentation preference. When enabled,
1189 this scans each file that is opened and sets the indent mode based on
1190 how many lines start with a tab vs. 2 or more spaces.</p>
1191 <p>The indent mode for the current document is shown on the status bar
1192 as follows:</p>
1193 <dl class="docutils">
1194 <dt>TAB</dt>
1195 <dd>Indent with Tab characters.</dd>
1196 <dt>SP</dt>
1197 <dd>Indent with spaces.</dd>
1198 <dt>T/S</dt>
1199 <dd>Indent with tabs and spaces, depending on how much indentation is
1200 on a line.</dd>
1201 </dl>
1202 </div>
1203 <div class="section">
1204 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id46" id="auto-indentation" name="auto-indentation">Auto-indentation</a></h3>
1205 <p>When enabled, auto-indentation happens when pressing <em>Enter</em> in the
1206 Editor. It adds a certain amount of indentation to the new line so the
1207 user doesn't always have to indent each line manually.</p>
1208 <p>Geany has four types of auto-indentation:</p>
1209 <dl class="docutils">
1210 <dt>None</dt>
1211 <dd>Disables auto-indentation completely.</dd>
1212 <dt>Basic</dt>
1213 <dd>Adds the same amount of whitespace on a new line as on the last line.</dd>
1214 <dt>Current chars</dt>
1215 <dd>Does the same as <em>Basic</em> but also indents a new line after an opening
1216 brace '{', and de-indents when typing a closing brace '}'. For Python,
1217 a new line will be indented after typing ':' at the end of the
1218 previous line.</dd>
1219 <dt>Match braces</dt>
1220 <dd>Similar to <em>Current chars</em> but the closing brace will be aligned to
1221 match the indentation of the line with the opening brace.</dd>
1222 </dl>
1223 </div>
1224 <div class="section">
1225 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id47" id="bookmarks" name="bookmarks">Bookmarks</a></h3>
1226 <p>Geany provides a handy bookmarking feature that lets you mark one
1227 or more lines in a document, and return the cursor to them using a
1228 key combination.</p>
1229 <p>To place a mark on a line, either left-mouse-click in the left margin
1230 of the editor window, or else use Ctrl-m. This will
1231 produce a small green plus symbol in the margin. You can have as many
1232 marks in a document as you like. Click again (or use Ctrl-m again)
1233 to remove the bookmark. To remove all the marks in a given document,
1234 use &quot;Remove Markers&quot; in the Document menu.</p>
1235 <p>To navigate down your document, jumping from one mark to the next,
1236 use Ctrl-. (control period). To go in the opposite direction on
1237 the page, use Ctrl-, (control comma). Using the bookmarking feature
1238 together with the commands to switch from one editor tab to another
1239 (Ctrl-PgUp/PgDn and Ctrl-Tab) provides a particularly fast way to
1240 navigate around multiple files.</p>
1241 </div>
1242 <div class="section">
1243 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id48" id="code-navigation-history" name="code-navigation-history">Code navigation history</a></h3>
1244 <p>To ease navigation in source files and especially between
1245 different files, Geany lets you jump between different navigation
1246 points. Currently, this works for the following:</p>
1247 <ul class="simple">
1248 <li><a class="reference" href="#go-to-tag-declaration">Go to tag declaration</a></li>
1249 <li><a class="reference" href="#go-to-tag-definition">Go to tag definition</a></li>
1250 <li>Symbol list items</li>
1251 <li>Build errors</li>
1252 <li>Message items</li>
1253 </ul>
1254 <p>When using one of these actions, Geany remembers your current position
1255 and jumps to the new one. If you decide to go back to your previous
1256 position in the file, just use &quot;Navigate back a location&quot;. To
1257 get back to the new position again, just use &quot;Navigate forward a
1258 location&quot;. This makes it easier to navigate in e.g.  foreign code
1259 and between different files.</p>
1260 </div>
1261 <div class="section">
1262 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id49" id="sending-text-through-custom-commands" name="sending-text-through-custom-commands">Sending text through custom commands</a></h3>
1263 <p>You can define several custom commands in Geany and send the current
1264 selection to one of these commands using the &quot;Edit-&gt;Format-&gt;Send
1265 Selection to&quot; menu or keybindings.
1266 The output of the command will be
1267 used to replace the current selection. This makes it possible to use text
1268 formatting tools with Geany in a general way. The selected text will
1269 be sent to the standard input of the executed command, so the command
1270 should be able to read from it and it should print all results to its
1271 standard output which will be read by Geany. To help finding errors
1272 in executing the command, the output of the program's standard error
1273 will be printed on Geany's standard output.</p>
1274 <p>To add a custom command, just go to the Set Custom Commands dialog
1275 in the Format sub menu of the Edit and Popup menu. Then click on Add
1276 to get a new text entry and type the command. You can also specify
1277 some command line options. To delete a command, just clear the text
1278 entry and press OK. It will be deleted automatically.</p>
1279 </div>
1280 <div class="section">
1281 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id50" id="context-actions" name="context-actions">Context actions</a></h3>
1282 <p>You can execute the context action command on the current word at the
1283 cursor position or the available selection.  This word or selection
1284 can be used as an argument to the command.
1285 The context action is invoked by a menu entry in the popup menu of the
1286 editor and also a keyboard shortcut (see the section called
1287 <a class="reference" href="#keybindings">Keybindings</a>).</p>
1288 <p>The command can be specified in the preferences dialog and also for
1289 each filetype (see &quot;context_action_cmd&quot; in the section called
1290 <a class="reference" href="#format">Format</a>). When the context action is invoked, the filetype
1291 specific command is used if available, otherwise the command
1292 specified in the preferences dialog is executed.</p>
1293 <p>The current word or selection can be referred with the wildcard &quot;%s&quot;
1294 in the command, it will be replaced by the current word or
1295 selection before the command is executed.</p>
1296 <p>For example a context action can be used to open API documentation
1297 in a browser window, the command to open the PHP API documentation
1298 would be:</p>
1299 <pre class="literal-block">
1300 firefox &quot;http://www.php.net/%s&quot;
1301 </pre>
1302 <p>when executing the command, the %s is substituted by the word near
1303 the cursor position or by the current selection. If the cursor is at
1304 the word &quot;echo&quot;, a browser window will open(assumed your browser is
1305 called firefox) and it will open the address: <a class="reference" href="http://www.php.net/echo">http://www.php.net/echo</a>.</p>
1306 </div>
1307 <div class="section">
1308 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id51" id="autocompletion" name="autocompletion">Autocompletion</a></h3>
1309 <p>Geany can offer a list of possible completions for symbols defined in the
1310 tags and for all words in a document.</p>
1311 <p>The autocompletion list for symbols is presented when the first few
1312 characters of the symbol are typed (configurable, see <a class="reference" href="#editor-completions-preferences">Editor Completions
1313 preferences</a>, default 4) or when the <em>Complete word</em>
1314 keybinding is pressed (configurable, see <a class="reference" href="#editor-keybindings">Editor keybindings</a>,
1315 default Ctrl-Space).</p>
1316 <p>When the defined keybinding is typed and the <em>Autocomplete all words in
1317 document</em> preference (in <a class="reference" href="#editor-completions-preferences">Editor Completions preferences</a>)
1318 is selected then the autocompletion list will show all matching words
1319 in the document, if there are no matching symbols.</p>
1320 <p>If you don't want to use autocompletion it can be dismissed until
1321 the next symbol by pressing Escape. The autocompletion list is updated
1322 as more characters are typed so that it only shows completions that start
1323 with the characters typed so far. If no symbols begin with the sequence,
1324 the autocompletion window is closed.</p>
1325 <p>The up and down arrows will move the selected item. The highlighted
1326 item on the autocompletion list can be chosen from the list by pressing
1327 Enter/Return. You can also double-click to select an item. The sequence
1328 will be completed to match the chosen item, and if the <em>Drop rest of
1329 word on completion</em> preference is set (in <a class="reference" href="#editor-completions-preferences">Editor Completions
1330 preferences</a>) then any characters after the cursor that match
1331 a symbol or word are deleted.</p>
1332 <div class="section">
1333 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id52" id="word-part-completion" name="word-part-completion">Word part completion</a></h4>
1334 <p>By default, pressing Tab will complete the selected item by word part;
1335 useful e.g. for adding the prefix <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">gtk_combo_box_entry_</span></tt> without typing it
1336 manually:</p>
1337 <ul class="simple">
1338 <li>gtk_com&lt;TAB&gt;</li>
1339 <li>gtk_combo_&lt;TAB&gt;</li>
1340 <li>gtk_combo_box_&lt;e&gt;&lt;TAB&gt;</li>
1341 <li>gtk_combo_box_entry_&lt;s&gt;&lt;ENTER&gt;</li>
1342 <li>gtk_combo_box_entry_set_text_column</li>
1343 </ul>
1344 <p>The key combination can be changed from Tab - See <a class="reference" href="#editor-keybindings">Editor keybindings</a>.
1345 If you clear/change the key combination for word part completion, Tab
1346 will complete the whole word instead, like Enter.</p>
1347 </div>
1348 <div class="section">
1349 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id53" id="scope-autocompletion" name="scope-autocompletion">Scope autocompletion</a></h4>
1350 <p>E.g.:</p>
1351 <pre class="literal-block">
1352 struct
1353 {
1354     int i;
1355     char c;
1356 } foo;
1357 </pre>
1358 <p>When you type <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">foo.</span></tt> it will show an autocompletion list with 'i' and
1359 'c' symbols.</p>
1360 <p>It only works for languages that set parent scope names for e.g. struct
1361 members. Currently this means C-like languages. The C tag parser only
1362 parses global scopes, so this won't work for structs or objects declared
1363 in local scope.</p>
1364 </div>
1365 </div>
1366 <div class="section">
1367 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id54" id="user-definable-snippets" name="user-definable-snippets">User-definable snippets</a></h3>
1368 <p>Snippets are small strings or code constructs which can be replaced or
1369 completed to a more complex string. So you can save a lot of time when
1370 typing common strings and letting Geany do the work for you.
1371 To know what to complete or replace Geany reads a configuration file
1372 called <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">snippets.conf</span></tt> at startup.</p>
1373 <p>Maybe you need to often type your name, so define a snippet like this:</p>
1374 <pre class="literal-block">
1375 [Default]
1376 myname=Enrico Tröger
1377 </pre>
1378 <p>Every time you write <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">myname</span></tt> &lt;TAB&gt; in Geany, it will replace &quot;myname&quot;
1379 with &quot;Enrico Tröger&quot;. The key to start autocompletion can be changed
1380 in the preferences dialog, by default it is TAB. The corresponding keybinding
1381 is called <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">Complete</span> <span class="pre">snippet</span></tt>.</p>
1382 <p>The system-wide configuration file can be found in
1383 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix/share/geany</span></tt>, where <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix</span></tt> is the path where Geany is
1384 installed (see <a class="reference" href="#installation-prefix">Installation prefix</a>). It is not recommended to edit the
1385 system-wide file, because it will be overridden when Geany is updated.</p>
1386 <p>To change the settings, copy the file from <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix/share/geany</span></tt>
1387 in your configuration directory (usually <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/.config/geany/</span></tt>).</p>
1388 <p>For example:</p>
1389 <pre class="literal-block">
1390 % cp /usr/local/share/geany/snippets.conf /home/username/.config/geany/
1391 </pre>
1392 <p>Then you can edit the file and the changes will remain available
1393 after an update of Geany because the file resides in your
1394 configuration directory. Alternatively, you can create a file
1395 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/.config/geany/snippets.conf</span></tt> and add only these settings you want
1396 to change. All missing settings will be read from the global snippets
1397 file in <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix/share/geany</span></tt>.</p>
1398 <p>The file <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">snippets.conf</span></tt> contains sections defining snippets that
1399 are available for particular filetypes and in general.</p>
1400 <p>The two sections &quot;Default&quot; and &quot;Special&quot; apply to all filetypes.
1401 &quot;Default&quot; contains all snippets which are available for every
1402 filetype and &quot;Special&quot; contains snippets which can only be used in
1403 other snippets. So you can define often used parts of snippets and
1404 just use the special snippet as a placeholder (see the
1405 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">snippets.conf</span></tt> for details).</p>
1406 <p>You can define sections with the name of a filetype eg &quot;C++&quot;.  The
1407 snippets in that section are only available for use in files with that
1408 filetype.  Snippets in filetype sections will hide snippets with the
1409 same name in the &quot;Default&quot; section when used in a file of that
1410 filetype.</p>
1411 <p>To define snippets you can use several special character sequences which
1412 will be replaced when using the snippet:</p>
1413 <p><strong>Substitution Sequences for snippets</strong></p>
1414 <table border="1" class="docutils">
1415 <colgroup>
1416 <col width="22%" />
1417 <col width="78%" />
1418 </colgroup>
1419 <tbody valign="top">
1420 <tr><td>\n or %newline%</td>
1421 <td>Insert a new line (it will be replaced by the used EOL
1422 char(s): LF, CR/LF, or CR).</td>
1423 </tr>
1424 <tr><td>\t or %ws%</td>
1425 <td>Insert an indentation step, it will be replaced according
1426 to the current document's indent mode.</td>
1427 </tr>
1428 <tr><td>\s</td>
1429 <td>\s to force whitespace at beginning or end of a value
1430 ('key= value' won't work, use 'key=\svalue')</td>
1431 </tr>
1432 <tr><td>%cursor%</td>
1433 <td>Place the cursor at this position after completion has
1434 been done. You can define multiple %cursor% wildcards
1435 and use the keybinding <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">Move</span> <span class="pre">cursor</span> <span class="pre">in</span> <span class="pre">snippet</span></tt> to jump
1436 to the next defined cursor position in the completed
1437 snippet.</td>
1438 </tr>
1439 <tr><td>%...%</td>
1440 <td>&quot;...&quot; means the name of a key in the &quot;Special&quot; section.
1441 If you have defined a key &quot;brace_open&quot; in the &quot;Special&quot;
1442 section you can use %brace_open% in any other snippet.</td>
1443 </tr>
1444 </tbody>
1445 </table>
1446 <p>Snippet names must not contain spaces otherwise they won't
1447 work correctly. But beside that you can define almost any
1448 string as a snippet and use it later in Geany. It is not limited
1449 to existing contructs of certain programming languages(like <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">if</span></tt>,
1450 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">for</span></tt>, <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">switch</span></tt>). Define whatever you need.</p>
1451 <p>Since Geany 0.15 you can also use most of the available templates wildcards
1452 listed in <a class="reference" href="#template-wildcards">Template wildcards</a>. All wildcards which are listed as
1453 <cite>available in snippets</cite> can be used. For instance to improve the above example:</p>
1454 <pre class="literal-block">
1455 [Default]
1456 myname=My name is {developer}
1457 mysystem=My system: {command:uname -a}
1458 </pre>
1459 <p>this will replace <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">myname</span></tt> with &quot;My name is &quot; and the value of the template
1460 preference <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">developer</span></tt>.</p>
1461 <p>You can change the way Geany recognizes the word to complete,
1462 that is how the start and end of a word is recognised when the
1463 snippet completion is requested. The section &quot;Special&quot; may
1464 contain a key &quot;wordchars&quot; which lists all characters a string may contain
1465 to be recognized as a word for completion. Leave it commented to use
1466 default characters or define it to add or remove characters to fit your
1467 needs.</p>
1468 </div>
1469 <div class="section">
1470 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id55" id="inserting-unicode-characters" name="inserting-unicode-characters">Inserting Unicode characters</a></h3>
1471 <p>With GTK 2.10 and above, you can insert Unicode code points by hitting
1472 Ctrl-Shift-u, then still holding Ctrl-Shift, type some hex digits representing
1473 the code point for the character you want and hit Enter or Return (still
1474 holding Ctrl-Shift). If you release Ctrl-Shift before hitting Enter or Return
1475 (or any other character), the code insertion is completed, but the typed
1476 character is also entered.  In the case of Enter/Return, it is a newline, as
1477 you might expect.</p>
1478 <p>In some earlier versions of Geany, you might need to first unbind Ctrl-Shift-u
1479 in the <a class="reference" href="#keybinding-preferences">keybinding preferences</a>, then select <em>Tools-&gt;Reload Configuration</em>
1480 or restart Geany. Note that it works slightly differently from other GTK
1481 applications, in that you'll need to continue to hold down the Ctrl and Shift
1482 keys while typing the code point hex digits (and the Enter or Return to finish the code point).</p>
1483 <p>For GTK &lt; 2.10, it is also possible, but typing the first Ctrl-Shift-u
1484 is not necessary. One problem is that you may find the alphabetic
1485 keys conflict with other Geany keybindings.</p>
1486 </div>
1487 </div>
1488 <div class="section">
1489 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id56" id="search-replace-and-go-to" name="search-replace-and-go-to">Search, replace and go to</a></h2>
1490 <p>This section describes search-related commands from the Search menu
1491 and the editor window's popup menu:</p>
1492 <ul class="simple">
1493 <li>Find</li>
1494 <li>Find usage *</li>
1495 <li>Find in files</li>
1496 <li>Replace</li>
1497 <li>Go to tag definition *</li>
1498 <li>Go to tag declaration *</li>
1499 <li>Go to line</li>
1500 </ul>
1501 <p>* These items are available from the editor window's popup menu, or by
1502 using a keyboard shortcut (see <a class="reference" href="#search-keybindings">Search keybindings</a>).</p>
1503 <div class="section">
1504 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id57" id="toolbar-entries" name="toolbar-entries">Toolbar entries</a></h3>
1505 <p>There are also two toolbar entries:</p>
1506 <ul class="simple">
1507 <li>Search bar</li>
1508 <li>Go to line entry</li>
1509 </ul>
1510 <p>There are keybindings to focus each of these - see <a class="reference" href="#focus-keybindings">Focus
1511 keybindings</a>. Pressing Escape will then focus the editor.</p>
1512 <div class="section">
1513 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id58" id="search-bar" name="search-bar">Search bar</a></h4>
1514 <p>The quickest way to find some text is to use the search bar entry in
1515 the toolbar. This performs a case-insensitive search in the current
1516 document whilst you type. Pressing Enter will search again.</p>
1517 </div>
1518 </div>
1519 <div class="section">
1520 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id59" id="find" name="find">Find</a></h3>
1521 <p>The Find dialog is used for finding text in one or more open documents.</p>
1522 <img alt="./images/find_dialog.png" src="./images/find_dialog.png" />
1523 <div class="section">
1524 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id60" id="matching-options" name="matching-options">Matching options</a></h4>
1525 <p>The syntax for the <em>Use regular expressions</em> option is shown in
1526 <a class="reference" href="#regular-expressions">Regular expressions</a>.</p>
1527 <div class="note">
1528 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
1529 <p class="last"><em>Use escape sequences</em> is implied for regular expressions.</p>
1530 </div>
1531 <p>The <em>Use escape sequences</em> option will transform any escaped characters
1532 into their UTF-8 equivalent. For example, \t will be transformed into
1533 a tab character. Other recognized symbols are: \\, \n, \r, \uXXXX
1534 (Unicode characters).</p>
1535 </div>
1536 <div class="section">
1537 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id61" id="find-all" name="find-all">Find all</a></h4>
1538 <p>To find all matches, click on the Find All expander. This will reveal
1539 several options:</p>
1540 <ul class="simple">
1541 <li>In Document</li>
1542 <li>In Session</li>
1543 <li>Mark</li>
1544 </ul>
1545 <p>Find All In Document will show a list of matching lines in the
1546 current document in the Messages tab of the Message Window. <em>Find All
1547 In Session</em> does the same for all open documents.</p>
1548 <p>Mark will highlight all matches in the current document with a
1549 colored box. These markers can be removed by selecting the
1550 Remove Markers command from the Document menu.</p>
1551 </div>
1552 <div class="section">
1553 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id62" id="change-font-in-search-dialog-text-fields" name="change-font-in-search-dialog-text-fields">Change font in search dialog text fields</a></h4>
1554 <p>All search related dialogs use a Monospace for the text input fields to
1555 increase the readability of input text. This is useful when you are
1556 typing input such as regular expressions with spaces, periods and commas which
1557 might it hard to read with a proportional font.</p>
1558 <p>If you want to change the font, you can do this easily
1559 by inserting the following style into your <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">.gtkrc-2.0</span></tt>
1560 (usually found in your home directory on UNIX-like systems and in the
1561 etc subdirectory of your Geany installation on Windows):</p>
1562 <pre class="literal-block">
1563 style &quot;search_style&quot;
1564 {
1565     font_name=&quot;Monospace 8&quot;
1566 }
1567 widget &quot;GeanyDialogSearch.*.GtkEntry&quot; style:highest &quot;search_style&quot;
1568 </pre>
1569 <p>Please note the addition of &quot;:highest&quot; in the last line which sets the priority
1570 of this style to the highest available. Otherwise, the style is ignored
1571 for the search dialogs.</p>
1572 </div>
1573 </div>
1574 <div class="section">
1575 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id63" id="find-usage" name="find-usage">Find usage</a></h3>
1576 <p>Find usage searches all open files. It is similar to the Find All In
1577 Session option in the Find dialog.</p>
1578 <p>If there is a selection, then it is used as the search text; otherwise
1579 the current word is used. The current word is either taken from the
1580 word nearest the edit cursor, or the word underneath the popup menu
1581 click position when the popup menu is used. The search results are
1582 shown in the Messages tab of the Message Window.</p>
1583 </div>
1584 <div class="section">
1585 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id64" id="find-in-files" name="find-in-files">Find in files</a></h3>
1586 <p>Find in files is a more powerful version of Find usage that searches
1587 all files in a certain directory using the Grep tool. The Grep tool
1588 must be correctly set in Preferences to the path of the system's Grep
1589 utility. GNU Grep is recommended.</p>
1590 <img alt="./images/find_in_files_dialog.png" src="./images/find_in_files_dialog.png" />
1591 <p>The Encoding combo box can be used to define the encoding of the files
1592 to be searched. The entered search text is converted to the chosen encoding
1593 and the search results are converted back to UTF-8.
1594 The Extra options field is used to pass any additional arguments to
1595 the grep tool.</p>
1596 <div class="section">
1597 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id65" id="filtering-out-version-control-files" name="filtering-out-version-control-files">Filtering out version control files</a></h4>
1598 <p>When using the <em>Recurse in subfolders</em> option with a directory that's
1599 under version control, you can set the <em>Extra options</em> field to filter
1600 out version control files.</p>
1601 <p>If you have GNU Grep &gt;= 2.5.2 you can use the <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">--exclude-dir</span></tt>
1602 argument to filter out CVS and hidden directories like <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">.svn</span></tt>.</p>
1603 <p>Example: <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">--exclude-dir=.svn</span> <span class="pre">--exclude-dir=CVS</span></tt></p>
1604 <p>If you have an older Grep, you can try using the <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">--exclude</span></tt> flag
1605 to filter out filenames.</p>
1606 <p>SVN Example: <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">--exclude=*.svn-base</span></tt></p>
1607 <p>The --exclude argument only matches the file name part, not the path.</p>
1608 </div>
1609 </div>
1610 <div class="section">
1611 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id66" id="replace" name="replace">Replace</a></h3>
1612 <p>The Replace dialog is used for replacing text in one or more open
1613 documents.</p>
1614 <img alt="./images/replace_dialog.png" src="./images/replace_dialog.png" />
1615 <p>The Replace dialog has the same options for matching text as the Find
1616 dialog. See the section <a class="reference" href="#matching-options">Matching options</a>.</p>
1617 <p>The <em>Use regular expressions</em> option allows regular expressions to
1618 be used in the search string and back references in the replacement
1619 text -- see the entry for '\n' in <a class="reference" href="#regular-expressions">Regular expressions</a>.</p>
1620 <div class="section">
1621 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id67" id="replace-all" name="replace-all">Replace all</a></h4>
1622 <p>To replace several matches, click on the <em>Replace All</em> expander. This
1623 will reveal several options:</p>
1624 <ul class="simple">
1625 <li>In Document</li>
1626 <li>In Session</li>
1627 <li>In Selection</li>
1628 </ul>
1629 <p><em>Replace All In Document</em> will replace all matching text in the
1630 current document. <em>Replace All In Session</em> does the same for all open
1631 documents. <em>Replace All In Selection</em> will replace all matching text
1632 in the current selection of the current document.</p>
1633 </div>
1634 </div>
1635 <div class="section">
1636 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id68" id="go-to-tag-definition" name="go-to-tag-definition">Go to tag definition</a></h3>
1637 <p>If the current word is the name of a tag definition (like a function
1638 body) and the file containing the tag definition is open, this command
1639 will switch to that file and go to the corresponding line number. The
1640 current word is either the word nearest the edit cursor,
1641 or the word underneath the popup menu click position when the popup
1642 menu is used.</p>
1643 </div>
1644 <div class="section">
1645 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id69" id="go-to-tag-declaration" name="go-to-tag-declaration">Go to tag declaration</a></h3>
1646 <p>Like Go to tag definition, but for a forward declaration such as a
1647 function prototype or <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">extern</span></tt> declaration instead of a function
1648 body.</p>
1649 </div>
1650 <div class="section">
1651 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id70" id="go-to-line" name="go-to-line">Go to line</a></h3>
1652 <p>Go to a particular line number in the current file.</p>
1653 </div>
1654 <div class="section">
1655 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id71" id="regular-expressions" name="regular-expressions">Regular expressions</a></h3>
1656 <p>You can use regular expressions in the Find and Replace dialogs
1657 by selecting the <em>Use regular expressions</em> check box (see <a class="reference" href="#matching-options">Matching
1658 options</a>). The syntax is POSIX compatible, as described in the table
1659 below.</p>
1660 <div class="note">
1661 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
1662 <ol class="last arabic simple">
1663 <li>The <em>Use escape sequences</em> dialog option always applies for regular
1664 expressions.</li>
1665 <li>Searching backwards with regular expressions is not supported.</li>
1666 <li>\b, \d, \s, \w are GNU extensions and may not be available
1667 on non-GNU POSIX systems unless you built Geany with the
1668 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">--enable-gnu-regex</span></tt> option (this is always used on Windows).</li>
1669 </ol>
1670 </div>
1671 <p><strong>In a regular expression, the following characters are interpreted:</strong></p>
1672 <table border="1" class="docutils">
1673 <colgroup>
1674 <col width="10%" />
1675 <col width="90%" />
1676 </colgroup>
1677 <tbody valign="top">
1678 <tr><td>.</td>
1679 <td>Matches any character.</td>
1680 </tr>
1681 <tr><td>(</td>
1682 <td>This marks the start of a region for tagging a match.</td>
1683 </tr>
1684 <tr><td>)</td>
1685 <td>This marks the end of a tagged region.</td>
1686 </tr>
1687 <tr><td>\n</td>
1688 <td><p class="first">Where n is 1 through 9 refers to the first through ninth tagged
1689 region when searching or replacing.</p>
1690 <p>Searching for (Wiki)\1 matches WikiWiki.</p>
1691 <p class="last">If the search string was Fred([1-9])XXX and the
1692 replace string was Sam\1YYY, when applied to Fred2XXX this
1693 would generate Sam2YYY.</p>
1694 </td>
1695 </tr>
1696 <tr><td>\0</td>
1697 <td>When replacing, the whole matching text.</td>
1698 </tr>
1699 <tr><td>\b</td>
1700 <td>This matches a word boundary.</td>
1701 </tr>
1702 <tr><td>\c</td>
1703 <td><p class="first">A backslash followed by d, D, s, S, w or W, becomes a
1704 character class (both inside and outside sets []).</p>
1705 <ul class="last simple">
1706 <li>d: decimal digits</li>
1707 <li>D: any char except decimal digits</li>
1708 <li>s: whitespace (space, \t \n \r \f \v)</li>
1709 <li>S: any char except whitespace (see above)</li>
1710 <li>w: alphanumeric &amp; underscore</li>
1711 <li>W: any char except alphanumeric &amp; underscore</li>
1712 </ul>
1713 </td>
1714 </tr>
1715 <tr><td>\x</td>
1716 <td>This allows you to use a character x that would otherwise have
1717 a special meaning. For example, \[ would be interpreted as [
1718 and not as the start of a character set. Use \\ for a literal
1719 backslash.</td>
1720 </tr>
1721 <tr><td>[...]</td>
1722 <td><p class="first">Matches one of the characters in the set. If the first
1723 character in the set is ^, it matches the characters NOT in
1724 the set, i.e. complements the set. A shorthand S-E (start
1725 dash end) is used to specify a set of characters S up to E,
1726 inclusive.</p>
1727 <p>The special characters ] and - have no special
1728 meaning if they appear first in the set. - can also be last
1729 in the set. To include both, put ] first: []A-Z-].</p>
1730 <p>Examples:</p>
1731 <pre class="last literal-block">
1732 []|-]    matches these 3 chars
1733 []-|]    matches from ] to | chars
1734 [a-z]    any lowercase alpha
1735 [^]-]    any char except - and ]
1736 [^A-Z]   any char except uppercase alpha
1737 [a-zA-Z] any alpha
1738 </pre>
1739 </td>
1740 </tr>
1741 <tr><td>^</td>
1742 <td>This matches the start of a line (unless used inside a set, see
1743 above).</td>
1744 </tr>
1745 <tr><td>$</td>
1746 <td>This matches the end of a line.</td>
1747 </tr>
1748 <tr><td>*</td>
1749 <td>This matches 0 or more times. For example, Sa*m matches Sm, Sam,
1750 Saam, Saaam and so on.</td>
1751 </tr>
1752 <tr><td>+</td>
1753 <td>This matches 1 or more times. For example, Sa+m matches Sam,
1754 Saam, Saaam and so on.</td>
1755 </tr>
1756 <tr><td>?</td>
1757 <td>This matches 0 or 1 time(s). For example, Joh?n matches John, Jon.</td>
1758 </tr>
1759 </tbody>
1760 </table>
1761 <div class="note">
1762 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
1763 <p class="last">This table is adapted from Scintilla and SciTE documentation,
1764 distributed under the <a class="reference" href="#license-for-scintilla-and-scite">License for Scintilla and SciTE</a>.</p>
1765 </div>
1766 </div>
1767 </div>
1768 <div class="section">
1769 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id72" id="tags" name="tags">Tags</a></h2>
1770 <p>Tags are information that relates symbols in a program with the
1771 source file location of the declaration and definition.</p>
1772 <p>Geany has built-in functionality for generating tag information (aka
1773 &quot;workspace tags&quot;) for supported filetypes when you open a file.  You
1774 can also have Geany automatically load external tag files (aka &quot;global
1775 tags files&quot;) upon startup, or manually using <em>Tools --&gt; Load Tags</em>.</p>
1776 <p>Geany uses its own tag file format, similar to what <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">ctags</span></tt> uses
1777 (but is incompatible with ctags). You use Geany to generate global
1778 tags files, as described below.</p>
1779 <div class="section">
1780 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id73" id="workspace-tags" name="workspace-tags">Workspace tags</a></h3>
1781 <p>Tags for each document are parsed whenever a file is loaded or
1782 saved. These are shown in the Symbol list in the Sidebar. These tags
1783 are also used for autocompletion of symbols and calltips for all documents
1784 open in the current session that have the same filetype.</p>
1785 <p>The <em>Go to Tag</em> commands can be used with all workspace tags. See
1786 <a class="reference" href="#go-to-tag-definition">Go to tag definition</a>.</p>
1787 </div>
1788 <div class="section">
1789 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id74" id="global-tags" name="global-tags">Global tags</a></h3>
1790 <p>Global tags are used to provide autocompletion of symbols and calltips
1791 without having to open the corresponding source files. This is intended
1792 for library APIs, as the tags file only has to be updated when you upgrade
1793 the library.</p>
1794 <p>You can load a custom global tags file in two ways:</p>
1795 <ul class="simple">
1796 <li>Using the <em>Load Tags</em> command in the Tools menu.</li>
1797 <li>By creating a directory <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/.config/geany/tags</span></tt>, and moving or symlinking
1798 the tags files there before starting Geany.</li>
1799 <li>By creating a directory <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix/share/geany/tags</span></tt>, and moving
1800 or symlinking the tags files there before starting Geany.
1801 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix</span></tt> is the installation prefix (see <a class="reference" href="#installation-prefix">Installation prefix</a>).</li>
1802 </ul>
1803 <p>You can either download these files or generate your own. They have
1804 the format:</p>
1805 <pre class="literal-block">
1806 name.lang_ext.tags
1807 </pre>
1808 <p><em>lang_ext</em> is one of the extensions set for the filetype associated
1809 with the tags. See the section called <a class="reference" href="#filetype-extensions">Filetype extensions</a> for
1810 more information.</p>
1811 <div class="section">
1812 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id75" id="default-global-tags-files" name="default-global-tags-files">Default global tags files</a></h4>
1813 <p>For some languages, a list of global tags is loaded when the
1814 corresponding filetype is first used. Currently these are for:</p>
1815 <ul class="simple">
1816 <li>C -- GTK+ and GLib</li>
1817 <li>Pascal</li>
1818 <li>PHP</li>
1819 <li>HTML -- &amp;symbol; completion, e.g. for ampersand, copyright, etc.</li>
1820 <li>LaTeX</li>
1821 <li>Python</li>
1822 </ul>
1823 </div>
1824 <div class="section">
1825 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id76" id="global-tags-file-format" name="global-tags-file-format">Global tags file format</a></h4>
1826 <p>Global tags files can have two different formats:</p>
1827 <ul class="simple">
1828 <li>Tagmanager format</li>
1829 <li>Pipe-separated format</li>
1830 </ul>
1831 <p>The first line of global tags files should be a comment, introduced
1832 by <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">#</span></tt> followed by a space and a string like <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">format=pipe</span></tt>
1833 or <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">format=tagmanager</span></tt> respectively, these are case-sensitive.
1834 This helps Geany to read the file properly. If this line
1835 is missing, Geany tries to auto-detect the used format but this
1836 might fail.</p>
1837 <p>The Tagmanager format is a bit more complex and is used for files
1838 created by the <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">geany</span> <span class="pre">-g</span></tt> command. There is one tag per line.
1839 Different tag attributes like the return value or the argument list
1840 are separated with different characters indicating the type of the
1841 following argument.</p>
1842 <p>The Pipe-separated format is easier to read and write.
1843 There is one tag per line and different tag attributes are separated
1844 by the pipe character (<tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">|</span></tt>). A line looks like:</p>
1845 <pre class="literal-block">
1846 basename|string|(string path [, string suffix])|
1847 </pre>
1848 <div class="line-block">
1849 <div class="line">The first field is the tag name (usually a function name).</div>
1850 <div class="line">The second field is the type of the return value.</div>
1851 <div class="line">The third field is the argument list for this tag.</div>
1852 <div class="line">The fourth field is the description for this tag but
1853 currently unused and should be left empty.</div>
1854 </div>
1855 <p>Except for the first field (tag name), all other field can be left
1856 empty but the pipe separator must appear for them.</p>
1857 <p>You can easily write your own global tag files using this format.
1858 Just save them in your tags directory, as described earlier in the
1859 section <a class="reference" href="#global-tags">Global tags</a>.</p>
1860 </div>
1861 <div class="section">
1862 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id77" id="generating-a-global-tags-file" name="generating-a-global-tags-file">Generating a global tags file</a></h4>
1863 <p>You can generate your own global tags files by parsing a list of
1864 source files. The command is:</p>
1865 <pre class="literal-block">
1866 geany -g [-P] &lt;Tag File&gt; &lt;File list&gt;
1867 </pre>
1868 <ul class="simple">
1869 <li>Tag File filename should be in the format described earlier --
1870 see the section called <a class="reference" href="#global-tags">Global tags</a>.</li>
1871 <li>File list is a list of filenames, each with a full path (unless
1872 you are generating C/C++ tags and have set the CFLAGS environment
1873 variable appropriately).</li>
1874 <li><tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">-P</span></tt> or <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">--no-preprocessing</span></tt> disables using the C pre-processor
1875 to process <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">#include</span></tt> directives for C/C++ source files. Use this
1876 option if you want to specify each source file on the command-line
1877 instead of using a 'master' header file. Also can be useful if you
1878 don't want to specify the CFLAGS environment variable.</li>
1879 </ul>
1880 <p>Example for the wxD library for the D programming language:</p>
1881 <pre class="literal-block">
1882 geany -g wxd.d.tags /home/username/wxd/wx/*.d
1883 </pre>
1884 <p><em>Generating C/C++ tag files:</em></p>
1885 <p>For C/C++ tag files, gcc and grep are required, so that header files
1886 can be preprocessed to include any other headers they depend upon.</p>
1887 <p>For C/C++ files, the environment variable CFLAGS should be set with
1888 appropriate <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">-I/path</span></tt> include paths. The following example works with
1889 the bash shell, generating tags for the GnomeUI library:</p>
1890 <pre class="literal-block">
1891 CFLAGS=`pkg-config --cflags libgnomeui-2.0` geany -g gnomeui.c.tags \
1892 /usr/include/libgnomeui-2.0/gnome.h
1893 </pre>
1894 <p>You can adapt this command to use CFLAGS and header files appropriate
1895 for whichever libraries you want.</p>
1896 <p><em>Replacing the default C/C++ tags file:</em></p>
1897 <p>Geany currently uses a default global tags file c99.tags for
1898 C and C++, commonly installed in /usr/share/geany. This file can
1899 be replaced with one containing tags parsed from a different set
1900 of header files. When Geany is next started, your custom tags file
1901 will be loaded instead of the default c99.tags. You should keep a
1902 copy of the generated tags file because it will get overwritten when
1903 upgrading Geany.</p>
1904 </div>
1905 </div>
1906 <div class="section">
1907 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id78" id="ignore-tags" name="ignore-tags">Ignore tags</a></h3>
1908 <p>You can also ignore certain tags if they would lead to wrong parsing of
1909 the code. Simply create a file called &quot;ignore.tags&quot; in your Geany
1910 configuration directory (usually <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/.config/geany/</span></tt>). Then list all tags
1911 you want to ignore in this file, separated by spaces and/or newlines.</p>
1912 <p>More detailed information about the usage from the Exuberant Ctags
1913 manual page:</p>
1914 <pre class="literal-block">
1915 Specifies a list of identifiers which are to be specially handled
1916 while  parsing C and C++ source files. This option is specifically
1917 provided to handle special cases arising through the use of
1918 pre-processor macros. When the identifiers listed are simple identifiers,
1919 these identifiers will be ignored during parsing of the source files.
1920 If an identifier is suffixed with a '+' character, ctags will also
1921 ignore any parenthesis-enclosed argument list which may immediately
1922 follow the identifier in the source files.
1923 If two identifiers are separated with the '=' character, the first
1924 identifiers is replaced by the second identifiers for parsing purposes.
1925 </pre>
1926 <p>For even more detailed information please read the manual page of
1927 Exuberant Ctags.</p>
1928 </div>
1929 </div>
1930 <div class="section">
1931 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id79" id="preferences" name="preferences">Preferences</a></h2>
1932 <p>You may adjust Geany's settings using the Edit --&gt; Preferences
1933 dialog. Any changes you make there can be applied by hitting either
1934 the Apply or the OK button. These settings will persist between Geany
1935 sessions. Note that most settings here have descriptive popup bubble
1936 help -- just hover the mouse over the item in question to get help
1937 on it.</p>
1938 <p>You may also adjust some View settings (under the View menu) that
1939 persist between Geany sessions. The settings under the Document menu,
1940 however, are only for the current document and revert to defaults
1941 when restarting Geany.</p>
1942 <p>There are also some rarer <a class="reference" href="#hidden-preferences">Hidden preferences</a>.</p>
1943 <div class="note">
1944 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
1945 <p class="last">In the paragraphs that follow, the text describing a dialog tab
1946 comes after the screenshot of that tab.</p>
1947 </div>
1948 <div class="section">
1949 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id80" id="general-startup-preferences" name="general-startup-preferences">General Startup preferences</a></h3>
1950 <img alt="./images/pref_dialog_gen_startup.png" src="./images/pref_dialog_gen_startup.png" />
1951 <div class="section">
1952 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id81" id="id1" name="id1">Startup</a></h4>
1953 <dl class="docutils">
1954 <dt>Load files from the last session</dt>
1955 <dd>On startup, load the same files you had open the last time you
1956 used Geany.</dd>
1957 <dt>Load virtual terminal support</dt>
1958 <dd>Load the library for running a terminal in the message window area.</dd>
1959 <dt>Enable plugin support</dt>
1960 <dd>Allow plugins to be used in Geany.</dd>
1961 </dl>
1962 </div>
1963 <div class="section">
1964 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id82" id="shutdown" name="shutdown">Shutdown</a></h4>
1965 <dl class="docutils">
1966 <dt>Save window position and geometry</dt>
1967 <dd>Save the current position and size of the main window so next time
1968 you open Geany it's in the same location.</dd>
1969 <dt>Confirm Exit</dt>
1970 <dd>Have a dialog pop up to confirm that you really want to quit Geany.</dd>
1971 </dl>
1972 </div>
1973 <div class="section">
1974 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id83" id="paths" name="paths">Paths</a></h4>
1975 <dl class="docutils">
1976 <dt>Startup path</dt>
1977 <dd>Path to start in when opening or saving files.
1978 It must be an absolute path.
1979 Leave it blank to use the current working directory.</dd>
1980 <dt>Project files</dt>
1981 <dd>Path to start in when opening project files.</dd>
1982 <dt>Extra plugin path</dt>
1983 <dd>By default Geany looks in the global installation path and in the
1984 configuration directory. In addition the path entered here will be searched
1985 for plugins. Usually you do not need to set an additional path to search for
1986 plugins. It might be useful when Geany is installed on a multi-user machine
1987 and additional plugins are available in a common location for all users.
1988 Leave blank to not set an additional lookup path.</dd>
1989 </dl>
1990 </div>
1991 </div>
1992 <div class="section">
1993 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id84" id="general-miscellaneous-preferences" name="general-miscellaneous-preferences">General Miscellaneous preferences</a></h3>
1994 <img alt="./images/pref_dialog_gen_misc.png" src="./images/pref_dialog_gen_misc.png" />
1995 <div class="section">
1996 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id85" id="miscellaneous" name="miscellaneous">Miscellaneous</a></h4>
1997 <dl class="docutils">
1998 <dt>Beep on errors when compilation has finished</dt>
1999 <dd>Have the computer make a beeping sound when compilation of your program
2000 has completed or any errors occurred.</dd>
2001 <dt>Switch status message list at new message</dt>
2002 <dd>Switch to the status message tab (in the notebook window at the bottom)
2003 once a new status message arrives.</dd>
2004 <dt>Suppress status messages in the status bar</dt>
2005 <dd><p class="first">Remove all messages from the status bar. The messages are still displayed
2006 in the status messages window.</p>
2007 <div class="last tip">
2008 <p class="first admonition-title">Tip</p>
2009 <p class="last">Another option is to use the <em>Switch to Editor</em> keybinding - it
2010 reshows the document statistics on the status bar. See <a class="reference" href="#focus-keybindings">Focus
2011 keybindings</a>.</p>
2012 </div>
2013 </dd>
2014 <dt>Use Windows File Open/Save dialogs</dt>
2015 <dd>Defines whether to use the native Windows File Open/Save dialogs or
2016 whether to use the GTK default dialogs.</dd>
2017 <dt>Auto-focus widgets (focus follows mouse)</dt>
2018 <dd>Give the focus automatically to widgets below the mouse cursor.
2019 This works for the main editor widget, the scribble, the toolbar search field
2020 goto line fields and the VTE.</dd>
2021 </dl>
2022 </div>
2023 <div class="section">
2024 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id86" id="search" name="search">Search</a></h4>
2025 <dl class="docutils">
2026 <dt>Always wrap search and hide the Find dialog</dt>
2027 <dd>Always wrap search around the document and hide the Find dialog after clicking
2028 Find Next/Previous.</dd>
2029 <dt>Use the current word under the cursor for Find dialogs</dt>
2030 <dd>Use current word under the cursor when opening the Find, Find in Files or Replace dialog and
2031 there is no selection. When this option is disabled, the search term last used in the
2032 appropriate Find dialog is used.</dd>
2033 <dt>Use the current file's directory for Find in Files</dt>
2034 <dd>When opening the Find in Files dialog, set the directory to search to the directory of the current
2035 active file. When this option is disabled, the directory of the last use of the Find in Files
2036 dialog is used.</dd>
2037 </dl>
2038 </div>
2039 <div class="section">
2040 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id87" id="projects" name="projects">Projects</a></h4>
2041 <dl class="docutils">
2042 <dt>Use project-based session files</dt>
2043 <dd>Save your current session when closing projects. You will be able to
2044 resume different project sessions, automatically opening the files
2045 you had open previously.</dd>
2046 <dt>Store project file inside the project base directory</dt>
2047 <dd>When creating new projects, the default path for the project file contains
2048 the project base path. Without this option enabled, the default project file
2049 path is one level above the project base path.
2050 In either case, you can easily set the final project file path in the
2051 <em>New Project</em> dialog. This option provides the more common
2052 defaults automatically for convenience.</dd>
2053 </dl>
2054 </div>
2055 </div>
2056 <div class="section">
2057 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id88" id="interface-preferences" name="interface-preferences">Interface preferences</a></h3>
2058 <img alt="./images/pref_dialog_interface.png" src="./images/pref_dialog_interface.png" />
2059 <div class="section">
2060 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id89" id="sidebar" name="sidebar">Sidebar</a></h4>
2061 <dl class="docutils">
2062 <dt>Show sidebar</dt>
2063 <dd>Whether to show the sidebar at all.</dd>
2064 <dt>Show symbol list</dt>
2065 <dd>Show the list of functions, variables, and other information in the
2066 current document you are editing.</dd>
2067 <dt>Show documents list</dt>
2068 <dd>Show all the documents you have open currently. This can be used to
2069 change between documents (see <a class="reference" href="#switching-between-documents">Switching between documents</a>) and
2070 to perform some common operations such as saving, closing and reloading.</dd>
2071 <dt>Position</dt>
2072 <dd>Whether to place the sidebar on the left or right of the editor window.</dd>
2073 </dl>
2074 </div>
2075 <div class="section">
2076 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id90" id="fonts" name="fonts">Fonts</a></h4>
2077 <dl class="docutils">
2078 <dt>Editor</dt>
2079 <dd>Change the font used to display documents.</dd>
2080 <dt>Symbol list</dt>
2081 <dd>Change the font used for the Symbols sidebar tab.</dd>
2082 <dt>Message window</dt>
2083 <dd>Change the font used for the message window area.</dd>
2084 </dl>
2085 </div>
2086 <div class="section">
2087 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id91" id="editor-tabs" name="editor-tabs">Editor tabs</a></h4>
2088 <dl class="docutils">
2089 <dt>Show editor tabs</dt>
2090 <dd>Show a notebook tab for all documents so you can switch between them
2091 using the mouse (instead of using the Documents window).</dd>
2092 <dt>Show close buttons</dt>
2093 <dd>Make each tab show a close button so you can easily close open
2094 documents.</dd>
2095 <dt>Placement of new file tabs</dt>
2096 <dd>Whether to create a document with its notebook tab to the left or
2097 right of all existing tabs.</dd>
2098 <dt>Next to current</dt>
2099 <dd>Whether to place file tabs next to the current tab
2100 rather than at the edges of the notebook.</dd>
2101 <dt>Double-clicking hides all additional widgets</dt>
2102 <dd>Whether to call the View-&gt;Toggle All Additional Widgets command
2103 when double-clicking on a notebook tab.</dd>
2104 </dl>
2105 </div>
2106 <div class="section">
2107 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id92" id="tab-positions" name="tab-positions">Tab positions</a></h4>
2108 <dl class="docutils">
2109 <dt>Editor</dt>
2110 <dd>Set the positioning of the editor's notebook tabs to the right,
2111 left, top, or bottom of the editing window.</dd>
2112 <dt>Sidebar</dt>
2113 <dd>Set the positioning of the sidebar's notebook tabs to the right,
2114 left, top, or bottom of the sidebar window.</dd>
2115 <dt>Message window</dt>
2116 <dd>Set the positioning of the message window's notebook tabs to the
2117 right, left, top, or bottom of the message window.</dd>
2118 </dl>
2119 </div>
2120 <div class="section">
2121 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id93" id="id2" name="id2">Miscellaneous</a></h4>
2122 <dl class="docutils">
2123 <dt>Show status bar</dt>
2124 <dd>Show the status bar at the bottom of the main window. It gives information about
2125 the file you are editing like the line and column you are on, whether any
2126 modifications were done, the file encoding, the filetype and other information.</dd>
2127 </dl>
2128 </div>
2129 </div>
2130 <div class="section">
2131 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id94" id="toolbar-preferences" name="toolbar-preferences">Toolbar preferences</a></h3>
2132 <p>Affects the main toolbar underneath the menu bar.</p>
2133 <img alt="./images/pref_dialog_toolbar.png" src="./images/pref_dialog_toolbar.png" />
2134 <div class="section">
2135 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id95" id="toolbar" name="toolbar">Toolbar</a></h4>
2136 <dl class="docutils">
2137 <dt>Show Toolbar</dt>
2138 <dd>Whether to show the toolbar.</dd>
2139 <dt>Append Toolbar to the Menu</dt>
2140 <dd>Allows to append the toolbar to the main menu bar instead of placing it below.
2141 This is useful to save vertical space.</dd>
2142 <dt>Customize Toolbar</dt>
2143 <dd>See <a class="reference" href="#customizing-the-toolbar">Customizing the toolbar</a>.</dd>
2144 </dl>
2145 </div>
2146 <div class="section">
2147 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id96" id="appearance" name="appearance">Appearance</a></h4>
2148 <dl class="docutils">
2149 <dt>Icon Style</dt>
2150 <dd>Select the toolbar icon style to use - either icons and text, just
2151 icons or just text.
2152 The choice System default uses whatever icon style is set by GTK.</dd>
2153 <dt>Icon size</dt>
2154 <dd>Select the size of the icons you see (large, small or very small).
2155 The choice System default uses whatever icon size is set by GTK.</dd>
2156 </dl>
2157 </div>
2158 </div>
2159 <div class="section">
2160 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id97" id="editor-features-preferences" name="editor-features-preferences">Editor Features preferences</a></h3>
2161 <img alt="./images/pref_dialog_edit_features.png" src="./images/pref_dialog_edit_features.png" />
2162 <div class="section">
2163 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id98" id="features" name="features">Features</a></h4>
2164 <dl class="docutils">
2165 <dt>Line wrapping</dt>
2166 <dd>Show long lines wrapped around to new display lines.</dd>
2167 <dt>Enable &quot;smart&quot; home key</dt>
2168 <dd>Whether to move the cursor to the first non-whitespace character
2169 on the line when you hit the home key on your keyboard. Pressing it
2170 again will go to the very start of the line.</dd>
2171 <dt>Disable Drag and Drop</dt>
2172 <dd>Do not allow the dragging and dropping of selected text in documents.</dd>
2173 <dt>Enable folding</dt>
2174 <dd>Allow groups of lines in a document to be collapsed for easier
2175 navigation/editing.</dd>
2176 <dt>Fold/Unfold all children of a fold point</dt>
2177 <dd>Whether to fold/unfold all child fold points when a parent line
2178 is folded.</dd>
2179 <dt>Use indicators to show compile errors</dt>
2180 <dd>Underline lines with compile errors using red squiggles to indicate
2181 them in the editor area.</dd>
2182 <dt>Newline strip trailing spaces</dt>
2183 <dd>Remove any white space at the end of the line when you hit the
2184 Enter/Return key.</dd>
2185 <dt>Line breaking column</dt>
2186 <dd>The editor column number to insert a newline at when Line Breaking
2187 is enabled for the current document.</dd>
2188 <dt>Comment toggle marker</dt>
2189 <dd>A string which is added when toggling a line comment in a source file.
2190 It is used to mark the comment as toggled.</dd>
2191 </dl>
2192 </div>
2193 </div>
2194 <div class="section">
2195 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id99" id="editor-indentation-preferences" name="editor-indentation-preferences">Editor Indentation preferences</a></h3>
2196 <img alt="./images/pref_dialog_edit_indentation.png" src="./images/pref_dialog_edit_indentation.png" />
2197 <div class="section">
2198 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id100" id="indentation-group" name="indentation-group">Indentation group</a></h4>
2199 <p>See <a class="reference" href="#indentation">Indentation</a> for more information.</p>
2200 <dl class="docutils">
2201 <dt>Type</dt>
2202 <dd><p class="first">When Geany inserts indentation, whether to use:</p>
2203 <ul class="simple">
2204 <li>Just Tabs</li>
2205 <li>Just Spaces</li>
2206 <li>Tabs and Spaces, depending on how much indentation is on a line</li>
2207 </ul>
2208 <p class="last">The <em>Tabs and Spaces</em> indent type is also known as <em>Soft tab
2209 support</em> in some other editors.</p>
2210 </dd>
2211 <dt>Width</dt>
2212 <dd>The width of a single indent size in spaces. By default the indent
2213 size is equivalent to 4 spaces.</dd>
2214 <dt>Detect from file</dt>
2215 <dd>Try to detect and set the indent type based on file content, when
2216 a file is opened.</dd>
2217 <dt>Auto-indent mode</dt>
2218 <dd><p class="first">The type of auto-indentation you wish to use after pressing Enter,
2219 if any.</p>
2220 <dl class="last docutils">
2221 <dt>Basic</dt>
2222 <dd>Just add the indentation of the previous line.</dd>
2223 <dt>Current chars</dt>
2224 <dd>Add indentation based on the current filetype and any characters at
2225 the end of the line such as <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">{</span></tt>, <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">}</span></tt> for C, <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">:</span></tt> for Python.</dd>
2226 <dt>Match braces</dt>
2227 <dd>Like <em>Current chars</em> but for C-like languages, make a closing
2228 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">}</span></tt> brace line up with the matching opening brace.</dd>
2229 </dl>
2230 </dd>
2231 <dt>Tab key indents</dt>
2232 <dd><p class="first">If set, pressing tab will indent the current line or selection, and
2233 unindent when pressing Shift-tab. Otherwise, the tab key will
2234 insert a tab character into the document (which can be different
2235 from indentation, depending on the indent type).</p>
2236 <div class="last note">
2237 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
2238 <p class="last">There are also separate configurable keybindings for indent &amp;
2239 unindent, but this preference allows the tab key to have different
2240 meanings in different contexts - e.g. for snippet completion.</p>
2241 </div>
2242 </dd>
2243 </dl>
2244 </div>
2245 </div>
2246 <div class="section">
2247 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id101" id="editor-completions-preferences" name="editor-completions-preferences">Editor Completions preferences</a></h3>
2248 <img alt="./images/pref_dialog_edit_completions.png" src="./images/pref_dialog_edit_completions.png" />
2249 <div class="section">
2250 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id102" id="completions" name="completions">Completions</a></h4>
2251 <dl class="docutils">
2252 <dt>Snippet Completion</dt>
2253 <dd>Whether to replace special keywords after typing Tab into a
2254 pre-defined text snippet.
2255 See <a class="reference" href="#user-definable-snippets">User-definable snippets</a>.</dd>
2256 <dt>XML tag autocompletion</dt>
2257 <dd>When you open an XML tag automatically generate its completion tag.</dd>
2258 <dt>Automatic continuation multi-line comments</dt>
2259 <dd><p class="first">Continue automatically multi-line comments in languages like C, C++
2260 and Java when a new line is entered inside such a comment.
2261 With this option enabled, Geany will insert a <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">*</span></tt> on every new line
2262 inside a multi-line comment, for example when you press return in the
2263 following C code:</p>
2264 <pre class="literal-block">
2265 /*
2266  * This is a C multi-line comment, press &lt;Return&gt;
2267 </pre>
2268 <p>then Geany would insert:</p>
2269 <pre class="literal-block">
2270 *
2271 </pre>
2272 <p class="last">on the next line with the correct indentation based on the previous line,
2273 as long as the multi-line is not closed by <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">*/</span></tt>.</p>
2274 </dd>
2275 <dt>Autocomplete symbols</dt>
2276 <dd>When you start to type a symbol name, look for the full string to
2277 allow it to be completed for you.</dd>
2278 <dt>Autocomplete all words in document</dt>
2279 <dd>When you start to type a word, Geany will search the whole document for
2280 words starting with the typed part to complete it, assuming there
2281 are no tag names to show.</dd>
2282 <dt>Drop rest of word on completion</dt>
2283 <dd>Remove any word part to the right of the cursor when choosing a
2284 completion list item.</dd>
2285 <dt>Characters to type for autocompletion</dt>
2286 <dd>Number of characters of a word to type before autocompletion is
2287 displayed.</dd>
2288 <dt>Completion list height</dt>
2289 <dd>The number of rows to display for the autocompletion window.</dd>
2290 <dt>Max. symbol name suggestions</dt>
2291 <dd>The maximum number of items in the autocompletion list.</dd>
2292 </dl>
2293 </div>
2294 <div class="section">
2295 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id103" id="auto-close-quotes-and-brackets" name="auto-close-quotes-and-brackets">Auto-close quotes and brackets</a></h4>
2296 <p>Geany can automatically insert a closing bracket and quote characters when
2297 you open them. For instance, you type a <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">(</span></tt> and Geany will automatically
2298 insert <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">)</span></tt>. With the following options, you can define for which
2299 characters this should work.</p>
2300 <dl class="docutils">
2301 <dt>Parenthesis ( )</dt>
2302 <dd>Auto-close parenthesis when typing an opening one</dd>
2303 <dt>Curly brackets { }</dt>
2304 <dd>Auto-close curly brackets (braces) when typing an opening one</dd>
2305 <dt>Square brackets [ ]</dt>
2306 <dd>Auto-close square brackets when typing an opening one</dd>
2307 <dt>Single quotes ' '</dt>
2308 <dd>Auto-close single quotes when typing an opening one</dd>
2309 <dt>Double quotes &quot; &quot;</dt>
2310 <dd>Auto-close double quotes when typing an opening one</dd>
2311 </dl>
2312 </div>
2313 </div>
2314 <div class="section">
2315 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id104" id="editor-display-preferences" name="editor-display-preferences">Editor Display preferences</a></h3>
2316 <p>This is for visual elements displayed in the editor window.</p>
2317 <img alt="./images/pref_dialog_edit_display.png" src="./images/pref_dialog_edit_display.png" />
2318 <div class="section">
2319 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id105" id="display" name="display">Display</a></h4>
2320 <dl class="docutils">
2321 <dt>Invert syntax highlighting colors</dt>
2322 <dd>Invert all colors, by default this makes white text on a black
2323 background.</dd>
2324 <dt>Show indendation guides</dt>
2325 <dd>Show vertical lines to help show how much leading indentation there
2326 is on each line.</dd>
2327 <dt>Show whitespaces</dt>
2328 <dd>Mark all tabs with an arrow &quot;--&gt;&quot; symbol and spaces with dots to
2329 show which kinds of whitespace are used.</dd>
2330 <dt>Show line endings</dt>
2331 <dd>Display a symbol everywhere that a carriage return or line feed
2332 is present.</dd>
2333 <dt>Show line numbers</dt>
2334 <dd>Show or hide the Line Number margin.</dd>
2335 <dt>Show markers margin</dt>
2336 <dd>Show or hide the small margin right of the line numbers, which is used
2337 to mark lines.</dd>
2338 <dt>Stop scrolling at last line</dt>
2339 <dd>When enabled Geany stops scrolling when at the last line of the document.
2340 Otherwise you can scroll one more page even if there are no real lines.</dd>
2341 </dl>
2342 </div>
2343 <div class="section">
2344 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id106" id="long-line-marker" name="long-line-marker">Long line marker</a></h4>
2345 <p>The long line marker helps to indicate overly-long lines, or as a hint
2346 to the user for when to break the line.</p>
2347 <dl class="docutils">
2348 <dt>Type</dt>
2349 <dd><dl class="first last docutils">
2350 <dt>Line</dt>
2351 <dd>Show a thin vertical line in the editor window at the given column
2352 position.</dd>
2353 <dt>Background</dt>
2354 <dd>Change the background color of characters after the given column
2355 position to the color set below. (This is recommended over the
2356 <em>Line</em> setting if you use proportional fonts).</dd>
2357 <dt>Disabled</dt>
2358 <dd>Don't mark long lines at all.</dd>
2359 </dl>
2360 </dd>
2361 <dt>Long line marker</dt>
2362 <dd>Set this value to a value greater than zero to specify the column
2363 where it should appear.</dd>
2364 <dt>Long line marker color</dt>
2365 <dd>Set the color of the long line marker.</dd>
2366 </dl>
2367 </div>
2368 <div class="section">
2369 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id107" id="virtual-spaces" name="virtual-spaces">Virtual spaces</a></h4>
2370 <p>Virtual space is space beyond the end of each line.
2371 The cursor may be moved into virtual space but no real space will be
2372 added to the document until there is some text typed or some other
2373 text insertion command is used.</p>
2374 <dl class="docutils">
2375 <dt>Disabled</dt>
2376 <dd>Do not show virtual spaces</dd>
2377 <dt>Only for rectangular selections</dt>
2378 <dd>Only show virtual spaces beyond the end of lines when drawing a rectangular selection</dd>
2379 <dt>Always</dt>
2380 <dd>Always show virtual spaces beyond the end of lines</dd>
2381 </dl>
2382 </div>
2383 </div>
2384 <div class="section">
2385 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id108" id="files-preferences" name="files-preferences">Files preferences</a></h3>
2386 <img alt="./images/pref_dialog_files.png" src="./images/pref_dialog_files.png" />
2387 <div class="section">
2388 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id109" id="new-files" name="new-files">New files</a></h4>
2389 <dl class="docutils">
2390 <dt>Open new documents from the command-line</dt>
2391 <dd>Whether to create new documents when passing filenames that don't
2392 exist from the command-line.</dd>
2393 <dt>Default encoding (new files)</dt>
2394 <dd>The type of file encoding you wish to use when creating files.</dd>
2395 <dt>Used fixed encoding when opening files</dt>
2396 <dd>Assume all files you are opening are using the type of encoding specified below.</dd>
2397 <dt>Default encoding (existing files)</dt>
2398 <dd>Opens all files with the specified encoding instead of auto-detecting it.
2399 Use this option when it's not possible for Geany to detect the exact encoding.</dd>
2400 <dt>Default end of line characters</dt>
2401 <dd>The end of line characters to which should be used for new files.
2402 On Windows systems, you generally want to use CR/LF which are the common
2403 characters to mark line breaks.
2404 On Unix-like systems, LF is default and CR is used on MAC systems.</dd>
2405 </dl>
2406 </div>
2407 <div class="section">
2408 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id110" id="saving-files" name="saving-files">Saving files</a></h4>
2409 <p>Perform formatting operations when a document is saved. These
2410 can each be undone with the Undo command.</p>
2411 <dl class="docutils">
2412 <dt>Ensure newline at file end</dt>
2413 <dd>Add a newline at the end of the document if one is missing.</dd>
2414 <dt>Strip trailing spaces</dt>
2415 <dd>Remove the trailing spaces on each line of the document.</dd>
2416 <dt>Replace tabs by space</dt>
2417 <dd><p class="first">Replace all tabs in the document with the equivalent number of spaces.</p>
2418 <div class="last note">
2419 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
2420 <p class="last">It is better to use spaces to indent than use this preference - see
2421 <a class="reference" href="#indentation">Indentation</a>.</p>
2422 </div>
2423 </dd>
2424 </dl>
2425 </div>
2426 <div class="section">
2427 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id111" id="id3" name="id3">Miscellaneous</a></h4>
2428 <dl class="docutils">
2429 <dt>Recent files list length</dt>
2430 <dd>The number of files to remember in the recently used files list.</dd>
2431 <dt>Disk check timeout</dt>
2432 <dd><p class="first">The number of seconds to periodically check the current document's
2433 file on disk in case it has changed. Setting it to 0 will disable
2434 this feature.</p>
2435 <div class="last note">
2436 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
2437 <p class="last">These checks are only performed on local files. Remote files are
2438 not checked for changes due to performance issues
2439 (remote files are files in <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/.gvfs/</span></tt>).</p>
2440 </div>
2441 </dd>
2442 </dl>
2443 </div>
2444 </div>
2445 <div class="section">
2446 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id112" id="tools-preferences" name="tools-preferences">Tools preferences</a></h3>
2447 <img alt="./images/pref_dialog_tools.png" src="./images/pref_dialog_tools.png" />
2448 <div class="section">
2449 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id113" id="tool-paths" name="tool-paths">Tool paths</a></h4>
2450 <dl class="docutils">
2451 <dt>Terminal</dt>
2452 <dd>The location of your terminal executable.</dd>
2453 <dt>Browser</dt>
2454 <dd>The location of your web browser executable.</dd>
2455 <dt>Grep</dt>
2456 <dd>The location of the grep executable.</dd>
2457 </dl>
2458 <div class="note">
2459 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
2460 <p class="last">For Windows users: at the time of writing it is recommended to use
2461 the grep.exe from the UnxUtils project
2462 (<a class="reference" href="http://sourceforge.net/projects/unxutils">http://sourceforge.net/projects/unxutils</a>). The grep.exe from the
2463 Mingw project for instance might not work with Geany at the moment.</p>
2464 </div>
2465 </div>
2466 <div class="section">
2467 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id114" id="commands" name="commands">Commands</a></h4>
2468 <dl class="docutils">
2469 <dt>Context action</dt>
2470 <dd>Set this to a command to execute on the current word.
2471 You can use the &quot;%s&quot; wildcard to pass the current word below the cursor
2472 to the specified command.</dd>
2473 </dl>
2474 </div>
2475 </div>
2476 <div class="section">
2477 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id115" id="template-preferences" name="template-preferences">Template preferences</a></h3>
2478 <p>This data is used as meta data for various template text to insert into
2479 a document, such as the file header. You only need to set fields that
2480 you want to use in your template files.</p>
2481 <div class="note">
2482 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
2483 <p class="last">For changes made here to take effect, you must either select
2484 <em>Tools-&gt;Reload Configuration</em> or restart Geany.</p>
2485 </div>
2486 <img alt="./images/pref_dialog_templ.png" src="./images/pref_dialog_templ.png" />
2487 <div class="section">
2488 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id116" id="template-data" name="template-data">Template data</a></h4>
2489 <dl class="docutils">
2490 <dt>Developer</dt>
2491 <dd>The name of the developer who will be creating files.</dd>
2492 <dt>Initials</dt>
2493 <dd>The initials of the developer.</dd>
2494 <dt>Mail address</dt>
2495 <dd><p class="first">The email address of the developer.</p>
2496 <div class="last note">
2497 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
2498 <p class="last">You may wish to add anti-spam markup, e.g. <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">name&lt;at&gt;site&lt;dot&gt;ext</span></tt>.</p>
2499 </div>
2500 </dd>
2501 <dt>Company</dt>
2502 <dd>The company the developer is working for.</dd>
2503 <dt>Initial version</dt>
2504 <dd>The initial version of files you will be creating.</dd>
2505 <dt>Year</dt>
2506 <dd>Specify a format for the the {year} wildcard. You can use any conversion specifiers
2507 which can be used with the ANSI C strftime function.  For details please see
2508 <a class="reference" href="http://man.cx/strftime">http://man.cx/strftime</a>.</dd>
2509 <dt>Date</dt>
2510 <dd>Specify a format for the the {date} wildcard. You can use any conversion specifiers
2511 which can be used with the ANSI C strftime function.  For details please see
2512 <a class="reference" href="http://man.cx/strftime">http://man.cx/strftime</a>.</dd>
2513 <dt>Date &amp; Time</dt>
2514 <dd>Specify a format for the the {datetime} wildcard. You can use any conversion specifiers
2515 which can be used with the ANSI C strftime function.  For details please see
2516 <a class="reference" href="http://man.cx/strftime">http://man.cx/strftime</a>.</dd>
2517 </dl>
2518 </div>
2519 </div>
2520 <div class="section">
2521 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id117" id="keybinding-preferences" name="keybinding-preferences">Keybinding preferences</a></h3>
2522 <img alt="./images/pref_dialog_keys.png" src="./images/pref_dialog_keys.png" />
2523 <p>There are some commands listed in the keybinding dialog that are not, by default,
2524 bound to a key combination, and may not be available as a menu item.</p>
2525 <div class="note">
2526 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
2527 <p class="last">For more information see the section <a class="reference" href="#keybindings">Keybindings</a>.</p>
2528 </div>
2529 </div>
2530 <div class="section">
2531 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id118" id="printing-preferences" name="printing-preferences">Printing preferences</a></h3>
2532 <img alt="./images/pref_dialog_printing.png" src="./images/pref_dialog_printing.png" />
2533 <dl class="docutils">
2534 <dt>Use external command for printing</dt>
2535 <dd>Use a system command to print your file out.</dd>
2536 <dt>Use native GTK printing</dt>
2537 <dd>Let the GTK GUI toolkit handle your print request.</dd>
2538 <dt>Print line numbers</dt>
2539 <dd>Print the line numbers on the left of your paper.</dd>
2540 <dt>Print page number</dt>
2541 <dd>Print the page number on the bottom right of your paper.</dd>
2542 <dt>Print page header</dt>
2543 <dd>Print a header on every page that is sent to the printer.</dd>
2544 <dt>Use base name of the printed file</dt>
2545 <dd>Don't use the entire path for the header, only the filename.</dd>
2546 <dt>Date format</dt>
2547 <dd>How the date should be printed. You can use the same format
2548 specifiers as in the ANSI C function strftime(). For details please
2549 see <a class="reference" href="http://man.cx/strftime">http://man.cx/strftime</a>.</dd>
2550 </dl>
2551 </div>
2552 <div class="section">
2553 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id119" id="terminal-vte-preferences" name="terminal-vte-preferences">Terminal (VTE) preferences</a></h3>
2554 <p>See also: <a class="reference" href="#virtual-terminal-emulator-widget-vte">Virtual terminal emulator widget (VTE)</a>.</p>
2555 <img alt="./images/pref_dialog_vte.png" src="./images/pref_dialog_vte.png" />
2556 <div class="section">
2557 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id120" id="terminal-widget" name="terminal-widget">Terminal widget</a></h4>
2558 <dl class="docutils">
2559 <dt>Terminal font</dt>
2560 <dd>Select the font that will be used in the terminal emulation control.</dd>
2561 <dt>Foreground color</dt>
2562 <dd>Select the font color.</dd>
2563 <dt>Background color</dt>
2564 <dd>Select the background color of the terminal.</dd>
2565 <dt>Scrollback lines</dt>
2566 <dd>The number of lines buffered so that you can scroll though the history.</dd>
2567 <dt>Shell</dt>
2568 <dd>The location of the shell on your system.</dd>
2569 <dt>Scroll on keystroke</dt>
2570 <dd>Scroll the terminal to the prompt line when pressing a key.</dd>
2571 <dt>Scroll on output</dt>
2572 <dd>Scroll the output down.</dd>
2573 <dt>Cursor blinks</dt>
2574 <dd>Let the terminal cursor blink.</dd>
2575 <dt>Override Geany keybindings</dt>
2576 <dd>Allow the VTE to receive keyboard shortcuts (apart from focus commands).</dd>
2577 <dt>Disable menu shortcut key (F10 by default)</dt>
2578 <dd>Disable the menu shortcut when you are in the virtual terminal.</dd>
2579 <dt>Follow path of the current file</dt>
2580 <dd>Make the path of the terminal change according to the path of the
2581 current file.</dd>
2582 <dt>Execute programs in VTE</dt>
2583 <dd>Execute programs in the virtual terminal instead of using the external
2584 terminal tool.  Note that if you run multiple execute commands at once
2585 the output may become mixed together in the VTE.</dd>
2586 <dt>Don't use run script</dt>
2587 <dd>Don't use the simple run script which is usually used to display
2588 the exit status of the executed program.
2589 This can be useful if you already have a program running in the VTE
2590 like a Python console (e.g. ipython). Use this with care.</dd>
2591 </dl>
2592 </div>
2593 </div>
2594 </div>
2595 <div class="section">
2596 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id121" id="project-management" name="project-management">Project Management</a></h2>
2597 <p>Project Management is optional in Geany. Currently it can be used for:</p>
2598 <ul class="simple">
2599 <li>Storing and opening session files on a project basis.</li>
2600 <li>Configuring the Build menu on a project basis.</li>
2601 </ul>
2602 <p>A list of session files can be stored and opened with the project
2603 when the <em>Use project-based session files</em> preference is enabled,
2604 in the <em>Project</em> group of the <a class="reference" href="#preferences">Preferences</a> dialog.</p>
2605 <p>As long as a project is open, the Build menu will use
2606 the items defined in project's settings, instead of the defaults.
2607 See <a class="reference" href="#build-menu-configuration">Build Menu Configuration</a> for information on configuring the menu.</p>
2608 <p>The current project's settings are saved when it is closed, or when
2609 Geany is shutdown. When restarting Geany, the previously opened project
2610 file that was in use at the end of the last session will be reopened.</p>
2611 <p>The project menu items are detailed below.</p>
2612 <div class="section">
2613 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id122" id="new-project" name="new-project">New Project</a></h3>
2614 <p>To create a new project, fill in the <em>Name</em> field. By default this
2615 will setup a new project file <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/projects/name.geany</span></tt>. Usually it's
2616 best to store all your project files in the same directory (they are
2617 independent of any source directory trees).</p>
2618 <p>The Base path text field is setup to use <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/projects/name</span></tt>. This
2619 can safely be set to any existing path -- it will not touch the file
2620 structure contained in it.</p>
2621 </div>
2622 <div class="section">
2623 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id123" id="project-properties" name="project-properties">Project Properties</a></h3>
2624 <p>You can set an optional description for the project, but it is not
2625 used elsewhere by Geany.</p>
2626 <p>The <em>Base path</em> field is used as the directory to run the Build menu commands.
2627 The specified path can be an absolute path or it is considered to be
2628 relative to the project's file name.</p>
2629 <div class="section">
2630 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id124" id="set-base-path-button" name="set-base-path-button">Set Base Path Button</a></h4>
2631 <p>This button is a convenience to set the working directory fields
2632 in the non-filetype Build menu items to %p to use the project base path.</p>
2633 <div class="note">
2634 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
2635 <p class="last">Pressing the 'set' button will override any working directories
2636 you have configured for the project.</p>
2637 </div>
2638 </div>
2639 </div>
2640 <div class="section">
2641 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id125" id="open-project" name="open-project">Open Project</a></h3>
2642 <p>The Open command displays a standard file chooser, starting in
2643 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/projects</span></tt>. Choose a project file named with the <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">.geany</span></tt>
2644 extension.</p>
2645 <p>When project session support is enabled, Geany will close the currently
2646 open files and open the session files associated with the project.</p>
2647 </div>
2648 <div class="section">
2649 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id126" id="close-project" name="close-project">Close Project</a></h3>
2650 <p>Project file settings are saved when the project is closed.</p>
2651 <p>When project session support is enabled, Geany will close the project
2652 session files and open any previously closed default session files.</p>
2653 </div>
2654 </div>
2655 <div class="section">
2656 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id127" id="build-menu" name="build-menu">Build Menu</a></h2>
2657 <p>After editing code with Geany, the next step is to compile, link, build,
2658 interpret, run etc.  As Geany supports many languages each with a different
2659 approach to such operations, and as there are also many language independent
2660 software building systems, Geany does not have a built-in build system, nor
2661 does it limit which system you can use.  Instead the build menu provides
2662 a configurable and flexible means of running any external commands to
2663 execute your preferred build system.</p>
2664 <p>This section provides a description of the default configuration of the
2665 build menu and then covers how to configure it, and where the defaults fit in.</p>
2666 <p>Running the commands from within Geany has two benefits:</p>
2667 <ul class="simple">
2668 <li>The current file is automatically saved before the command is run.</li>
2669 <li>The output is captured in the Compiler notebook tab and parsed for
2670 warnings or errors.</li>
2671 </ul>
2672 <p>Warnings and errors that can be parsed for line numbers will be shown in
2673 red in the Compiler tab and you can click on them to switch to the relevant
2674 source file (or open it) and mark the line number.  Also lines with
2675 warnings or errors are marked in the source, see <a class="reference" href="#indicators">Indicators</a> below.</p>
2676 <div class="tip">
2677 <p class="first admonition-title">Tip</p>
2678 <p class="last">If Geany's default error message parsing does not parse errors for
2679 the tool you're using, you can set a custom regex in the Build Commands
2680 Dialog, see <a class="reference" href="#build-menu-configuration">Build Menu Configuration</a>.</p>
2681 </div>
2682 <div class="section">
2683 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id128" id="indicators" name="indicators">Indicators</a></h3>
2684 <p>Indicators are red squiggly underlines which are used to highlight
2685 errors which occurred while compiling the current file. So you can
2686 easily see where your code failed to compile. You can remove them by
2687 selecting <em>Remove Error Indicators</em> in the Document menu.</p>
2688 <p>If you do not like this feature, you can disable it - see <a class="reference" href="#editor-features-preferences">Editor Features
2689 preferences</a>.</p>
2690 </div>
2691 <div class="section">
2692 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id129" id="default-build-menu-items" name="default-build-menu-items">Default Build Menu Items</a></h3>
2693 <p>Depending on the current file's filetype, the default Build menu will contain
2694 the following items:</p>
2695 <ul class="simple">
2696 <li>Compile</li>
2697 <li>Build</li>
2698 <li>Make All</li>
2699 <li>Make Custom Target</li>
2700 <li>Make Object</li>
2701 <li>Next Error</li>
2702 <li>Previous Error</li>
2703 <li>Execute</li>
2704 <li>Set Build Menu Commands</li>
2705 </ul>
2706 <div class="section">
2707 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id130" id="compile" name="compile">Compile</a></h4>
2708 <p>The Compile command has different uses for different kinds of files.</p>
2709 <p>For compilable languages such as C and C++, the Compile command is
2710 set up to compile the current source file into a binary object file.</p>
2711 <p>Java source files will be compiled to class file bytecode.</p>
2712 <p>Interpreted languages such as Perl, Python, Ruby will compile to
2713 bytecode if the language supports it, or will run a syntax check,
2714 or if that is not available will run the file in its language interpreter.</p>
2715 </div>
2716 <div class="section">
2717 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id131" id="build" name="build">Build</a></h4>
2718 <p>For compilable languages such as C and C++, the Build command will link
2719 the current source file's equivalent object file into an executable. If
2720 the object file does not exist, the source will be compiled and linked
2721 in one step, producing just the executable binary.</p>
2722 <p>Interpreted languages do not use the Build command.</p>
2723 <div class="note">
2724 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
2725 <p class="last">If you need complex settings for your build system, or several
2726 different settings, then writing a Makefile and using the Make
2727 commands is recommended; this will also make it easier for users to
2728 build your software.</p>
2729 </div>
2730 </div>
2731 <div class="section">
2732 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id132" id="make" name="make">Make</a></h4>
2733 <p>This runs &quot;make&quot; in the same directory as the
2734 current file.</p>
2735 </div>
2736 <div class="section">
2737 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id133" id="make-custom-target" name="make-custom-target">Make custom target</a></h4>
2738 <p>This is similar to running 'Make' but you will be prompted for
2739 the make target name to be passed to the Make tool. For example,
2740 typing 'clean' in the dialog prompt will run &quot;make clean&quot;.</p>
2741 </div>
2742 <div class="section">
2743 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id134" id="make-object" name="make-object">Make object</a></h4>
2744 <p>Make object will run &quot;make current_file.o&quot; in the same directory as
2745 the current file, using the filename for 'current_file'. It is useful
2746 for building just the current file without building the whole project.</p>
2747 </div>
2748 <div class="section">
2749 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id135" id="next-error" name="next-error">Next Error</a></h4>
2750 <p>The next error item will move to the next detected error in the file.</p>
2751 </div>
2752 <div class="section">
2753 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id136" id="previous-error" name="previous-error">Previous Error</a></h4>
2754 <p>The previous error item will move to the previous detected error in the file.</p>
2755 </div>
2756 <div class="section">
2757 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id137" id="execute" name="execute">Execute</a></h4>
2758 <p>Execute will run the corresponding executable file, shell script or
2759 interpreted script in a terminal window. Note that the Terminal tool
2760 path must be correctly set in the Tools tab of the Preferences dialog -
2761 you can use any terminal program that runs a Bourne compatible shell
2762 and accept the &quot;-e&quot; command line argument to start a command or can be
2763 selected to use the built-in VTE if it is available - see
2764 <a class="reference" href="#virtual-terminal-emulator-widget-vte">Virtual terminal emulator widget (VTE)</a>.</p>
2765 <p>After your program or script has finished executing, you will be
2766 prompted to press the return key. This allows you to review any text
2767 output from the program before the terminal window is closed.</p>
2768 <div class="note">
2769 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
2770 <p class="last">The execute command output is not parsed for errors.</p>
2771 </div>
2772 </div>
2773 <div class="section">
2774 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id138" id="stopping-running-processes" name="stopping-running-processes">Stopping running processes</a></h4>
2775 <p>When there is a running program, the Execute menu item in the menu and
2776 the Run button in the toolbar
2777 each become a stop button so you can stop the current running program (and
2778 any child processes). This works by sending the SIGQUIT signal to the process.</p>
2779 <p>Depending on the process you started it is possible that the process
2780 cannot be stopped. For example this can happen when the process creates
2781 more than one child process.</p>
2782 <div class="section">
2783 <h5><a class="toc-backref" href="#id139" id="terminal-emulators" name="terminal-emulators">Terminal emulators</a></h5>
2784 <p>Xterm is known to work properly. If you are using &quot;Terminal&quot;
2785 (the terminal program of Xfce), you should add the command line
2786 option <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">--disable-server</span></tt> otherwise the started process cannot be
2787 stopped. Just add this option in the preferences dialog on the Tools
2788 tab in the terminal field.</p>
2789 </div>
2790 </div>
2791 <div class="section">
2792 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id140" id="set-build-commands" name="set-build-commands">Set Build Commands</a></h4>
2793 <p>By default the Compile and Build commands invoke the GCC compiler and
2794 linker with only the basic arguments needed by all programs. Using
2795 <em>Set Build Commands</em> you can add any include paths and compile
2796 flags for the compiler, any library names and paths for the linker,
2797 and any arguments you want to use when running Execute.</p>
2798 </div>
2799 </div>
2800 <div class="section">
2801 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id141" id="build-menu-configuration" name="build-menu-configuration">Build Menu Configuration</a></h3>
2802 <p>The build menu has considerable flexibility and configurability, allowing
2803 both menu labels the commands they execute and the directory they execute
2804 in to be configured.</p>
2805 <p>For example, if you change one of the default make commands to run say 'waf'
2806 you can also change the label to match.</p>
2807 <p>These settings are saved automatically when Geany is shut down.</p>
2808 <p>The build menu is divided into four groups of items each with different
2809 behaviors:</p>
2810 <ul>
2811 <li><p class="first">File items - are configurable and depend on the filetype of the current
2812 document; they capture output in the compiler tab and parse it for
2813 errors.</p>
2814 </li>
2815 <li><p class="first">Non-file items - are configurable and mostly don't depend on the filetype
2816 of the current document; they also capture output in the compiler tab and
2817 parse it for errors.</p>
2818 </li>
2819 <li><p class="first">Execute items - are configurable and intended for executing your
2820 program or other long running programs.  The output is not parsed for errors
2821 and is directed to the terminal selected in preferences.</p>
2822 </li>
2823 <li><dl class="first docutils">
2824 <dt>Fixed items - these perform built-in actions:</dt>
2825 <dd><ul class="first last simple">
2826 <li>Go to the next error.</li>
2827 <li>Go to the previous error.</li>
2828 <li>Show the build menu commands dialog.</li>
2829 </ul>
2830 </dd>
2831 </dl>
2832 </li>
2833 </ul>
2834 <p>The maximum numbers of items in each of the configurable groups can be
2835 configured when Geany starts using hidden settings (see <a class="reference" href="#preferences-file-format">Preferences File Format</a>).
2836 Even though the maximum number of items may have been increased, only
2837 those menu items that have values configured are shown in the menu.</p>
2838 <p>The groups of menu items obtain their configuration from four potential
2839 sources.  The highest priority source that has the menu item defined will
2840 be used. The sources in decreasing priority are:</p>
2841 <ul class="simple">
2842 <li>A project file if open</li>
2843 <li>The user preferences</li>
2844 <li>The system filetype definitions</li>
2845 <li>The defaults</li>
2846 </ul>
2847 <p>The detailed relationships between sources and the configurable menu item groups
2848 is shown in the following table.</p>
2849 <table border="1" class="docutils">
2850 <colgroup>
2851 <col width="13%" />
2852 <col width="19%" />
2853 <col width="23%" />
2854 <col width="17%" />
2855 <col width="28%" />
2856 </colgroup>
2857 <thead valign="bottom">
2858 <tr><th class="head">Group</th>
2859 <th class="head">Project File</th>
2860 <th class="head">Preferences</th>
2861 <th class="head">System Filetype</th>
2862 <th class="head">Defaults</th>
2863 </tr>
2864 </thead>
2865 <tbody valign="top">
2866 <tr><td>Filetype</td>
2867 <td><p class="first">Loads From: project
2868 file</p>
2869 <p class="last">Saves To: project
2870 file</p>
2871 </td>
2872 <td><p class="first">Loads From:
2873 filetype.xxx file in
2874 ~/.config/geany/filedefs</p>
2875 <p class="last">Saves to: as above,
2876 creating if needed.</p>
2877 </td>
2878 <td><p class="first">Loads From:
2879 filetype.xxx in
2880 Geany install</p>
2881 <p class="last">Saves to: as user
2882 preferences left.</p>
2883 </td>
2884 <td>None</td>
2885 </tr>
2886 <tr><td>Non-Filetype</td>
2887 <td><p class="first">Loads From: project
2888 file</p>
2889 <p class="last">Saves To: project
2890 file</p>
2891 </td>
2892 <td><p class="first">Loads From:
2893 geany.conf file in
2894 ~/.config/geany</p>
2895 <p class="last">Saves to: as above,
2896 creating if needed.</p>
2897 </td>
2898 <td><p class="first">Loads From:
2899 filetype.xxx in
2900 Geany install</p>
2901 <p class="last">Saves to: as user
2902 preferences left.</p>
2903 </td>
2904 <td><dl class="first last docutils">
2905 <dt>1:</dt>
2906 <dd>Label: _Make
2907 Command: make</dd>
2908 <dt>2:</dt>
2909 <dd>Label: Make Custom _Target
2910 Command: make</dd>
2911 <dt>3:</dt>
2912 <dd>Label: Make _Object
2913 Command: make %e.o</dd>
2914 </dl>
2915 </td>
2916 </tr>
2917 <tr><td>Execute</td>
2918 <td><p class="first">Loads From: project
2919 file or else
2920 filetype defined in
2921 project file</p>
2922 <p class="last">Saves To:
2923 project file</p>
2924 </td>
2925 <td><p class="first">Loads From:
2926 geany.conf file in
2927 ~/.config/geany or else
2928 filetype.xxx file in
2929 ~/.config/geany/filedefs</p>
2930 <p class="last">Saves To:
2931 filetype.xxx file in
2932 ~/.config/geany/filedefs</p>
2933 </td>
2934 <td><p class="first">Loads From:
2935 filetype.xxx in
2936 Geany install</p>
2937 <p class="last">Saves To: as user
2938 preferences left</p>
2939 </td>
2940 <td>Label: _Execute Command: ./%e</td>
2941 </tr>
2942 </tbody>
2943 </table>
2944 <p>The following notes on the table reference cells by coordinate as (group,source):</p>
2945 <ul class="simple">
2946 <li>General - for filetype.xxx substitute the filetype name of the
2947 current document for xxx.</li>
2948 <li>System Filetypes - Labels loaded from these sources are locale sensitive
2949 and can contain translations.</li>
2950 <li>(Filetype, Project File) and (Filetype, Preferences) - preferences use a full
2951 filetype file so that users can configure all other filetype preferences
2952 as well.  Projects can only configure menu items per filetype.  Saving
2953 in the project file means that there is only one file per project not
2954 a whole directory.</li>
2955 <li>(Non-Filetype, System Filetype) - although conceptually strange, defining
2956 non-filetype commands in a filetype file, this provides the ability to
2957 define filetype dependent default menu items.</li>
2958 <li>(Execute, Project File) and (Execute, Preferences) - the project filetype based execute
2959 configuration and preferences non-filetype based execute can only be set by hand editing the
2960 appropriate file, see <a class="reference" href="#preferences-file-format">Preferences File Format</a> and <a class="reference" href="#project-file-format">Project File Format</a>.</li>
2961 </ul>
2962 </div>
2963 <div class="section">
2964 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id142" id="build-menu-commands-dialog" name="build-menu-commands-dialog">Build Menu Commands Dialog</a></h3>
2965 <p>Most of the configuration of the build menu is done through the Build Menu
2966 Commands Dialog.  You edit the configuration sourced from preferences in the
2967 dialog opened from the Build-&gt;Build Menu Commands item and you edit the
2968 configuration from the project in the build tab of the project preferences
2969 dialog.  Both use the same form shown below.</p>
2970 <img alt="./images/build_menu_commands_dialog.png" src="./images/build_menu_commands_dialog.png" />
2971 <p>The dialog is divided into three sections:</p>
2972 <ul class="simple">
2973 <li>Filetype menu items which will be selected based on the filetype of the
2974 currently open document.</li>
2975 <li>Non-filetype menu items.</li>
2976 <li>Execute menu items.</li>
2977 </ul>
2978 <p>The filetype and non-filetype sections also each contain a field for the regular
2979 expression used for parsing command output for error and warning messages.</p>
2980 <p>The columns in the first three sections allow setting of the label, command,
2981 and working directory to run the command in.</p>
2982 <p>An item with an empty label will not be shown in the menu.</p>
2983 <p>An empty working directory will default to the directory of the current document.
2984 If there is no current document then the command will not run.</p>
2985 <p>The dialog will always show the command selected by priority, not just the
2986 commands configured in this configuration source. This ensures that you always
2987 see what the menu item is going to do if activated.</p>
2988 <p>If the current source of the menu item is higher priority than the
2989 configuration source you are editing then the command will be shown
2990 in the dialog but will be insensitive (greyed out).  This can't happen
2991 with the project source but can with the preferences source dialog.</p>
2992 <p>The clear buttons remove the definition from the configuration source you are editing.
2993 When you do this the command from the next lower priority source will be shown.
2994 To hide lower priority menu items without having anything show in the menu
2995 configure with a nothing in the label but at least one character in the command.</p>
2996 <div class="section">
2997 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id143" id="substitutions-in-commands-and-working-directories" name="substitutions-in-commands-and-working-directories">Substitutions in Commands and Working Directories</a></h4>
2998 <p>The first occurance of each of the following character sequences in each of the
2999 command and working directory fields is substituted by the items specified below
3000 before the command is run.</p>
3001 <ul class="simple">
3002 <li>%d - substituted by the absolute path to the directory of the current file.</li>
3003 <li>%e - substituted by the name of the current file without the extension or path.</li>
3004 <li>%f - substituted by the name of the current file without the path.</li>
3005 <li>%p - if a project is open, substituted by the base path from the project.</li>
3006 </ul>
3007 <div class="note">
3008 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
3009 <p class="last">If the basepath set in the project preferences is not an absolute path , then it is
3010 taken as relative to the directory of the project file.  This allows a project file
3011 stored in the source tree to specify all commands and working directories relative
3012 to the tree itself, so that the whole tree including the project file, can be moved
3013 and even checked into and out of version control without having to re-configure the
3014 build menu.</p>
3015 </div>
3016 </div>
3017 <div class="section">
3018 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id144" id="build-menu-keyboard-shortcuts" name="build-menu-keyboard-shortcuts">Build Menu Keyboard Shortcuts</a></h4>
3019 <p>Keyboard shortcuts can be defined for the first two filetype menu items, the first three
3020 non-filetype menu items, the first two execute menu items and the fixed menu items.
3021 In the keybindings configuration dialog (see <a class="reference" href="#keybinding-preferences">Keybinding preferences</a>)
3022 these items are identified by the default labels shown in the <a class="reference" href="#build-menu">Build Menu</a> section above.</p>
3023 <p>It is currently not possible to bind keyboard shortcuts to more than these menu items.</p>
3024 <p>You can also use underlines in the labels to set mnemonic characters.</p>
3025 </div>
3026 <div class="section">
3027 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id145" id="configuration-files" name="configuration-files">Configuration Files</a></h4>
3028 <p>The configurable Build Menu capability was introduced in Geany 0.19 and
3029 required a new section to be added to the configuration files (See
3030 <a class="reference" href="#preferences-file-format">Preferences File Format</a>).  Geany will still load older format project,
3031 preferences and filetype file settings and will attempt to map them into the new
3032 configuration format.  There is not a simple clean mapping between the formats.
3033 The mapping used produces the most sensible results for the majority of cases.
3034 However, if they do not map the way you want, you may have to manually
3035 configure some settings using the Build Commands
3036 Dialog or the Build tab of the project preferences dialog.</p>
3037 <p>Any setting configured in either of these dialogs will override settings mapped from
3038 older format configuration files.</p>
3039 </div>
3040 </div>
3041 </div>
3042 <div class="section">
3043 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id146" id="printing-support" name="printing-support">Printing support</a></h2>
3044 <p>Since Geany 0.13 there has been printing support using GTK's printing API.
3045 The printed page(s) will look nearly the same as on your screen in Geany.
3046 Additionally, there are some options to modify the printed page(s).</p>
3047 <div class="note">
3048 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
3049 <p class="last">The background text color is set to white, except for text with
3050 a white foreground. This allows dark color schemes to save ink
3051 when printing.</p>
3052 </div>
3053 <p>You can define whether to print line numbers, page numbers at the bottom of
3054 each page and whether to print a page header on each page. This header
3055 contains the filename of the printed document, the current page number and
3056 the date and time of printing. By default, the file name of the document
3057 with full path information is added to the header. If you prefer to add
3058 only the basename of the file(without any path information) you can set it
3059 in the preferences dialog. You can also adjust the format of the date and
3060 time added to the page header. The available conversion specifiers are the
3061 same as the ones which can be used with the ANSI C strftime function.</p>
3062 <p>All of these settings can also be changed in the print dialog just before
3063 actual printing is done.
3064 On Unix-like systems the provided print dialog offers a print preview. The
3065 preview file is opened with a PDF viewer and by default GTK uses <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">evince</span></tt>
3066 for print preview. If you have not installed evince or just want to use
3067 another PDF viewer, you can change the program to use in the file
3068 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">.gtkrc-2.0</span></tt> (usually found in your home directory). Simply add a line
3069 like:</p>
3070 <pre class="literal-block">
3071 gtk-print-preview-command = &quot;epdfview %f&quot;
3072 </pre>
3073 <p>at the end of the file. Of course, you can also use xpdf, kpdf or whatever
3074 as the print preview command.</p>
3075 <p>Unfortunately, native GTK printing support is only available if Geany was
3076 built against GTK 2.10 (or above) <strong>and</strong> is running with GTK 2.10 (or above).
3077 If not, Geany provides basic printing support. This means you can print a
3078 file by passing the filename of the current file to a command which
3079 actually prints the file. However, the printed document contains no syntax
3080 highlighting. You can adjust the command to which the filename is
3081 passed in the preferences dialog. The default command is:</p>
3082 <pre class="literal-block">
3083 % lpr %f
3084 </pre>
3085 <p><tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">%f</span></tt> will be substituted by the filename of the current file. Geany
3086 will not show errors from the command itself, so you should make
3087 sure that it works before(e.g. by trying to execute it from the
3088 command line).</p>
3089 <p>A nicer example, which many prefer is:</p>
3090 <pre class="literal-block">
3091 % a2ps -1 --medium=A4 -o - %f | xfprint4
3092 </pre>
3093 <p>But this depends on a2ps and xfprint4. As a replacement for xfprint4,
3094 gtklp or similar programs can be used.</p>
3095 </div>
3096 <div class="section">
3097 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id147" id="plugins" name="plugins">Plugins</a></h2>
3098 <p>Plugins are loaded at startup, if the <em>Enable plugin support</em>
3099 general preference is set. There is also a command-line option,
3100 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">-p</span></tt>, which prevents plugins being loaded. Plugins are scanned in
3101 the following directories:</p>
3102 <ul class="simple">
3103 <li><tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix/lib/geany</span></tt> (see <a class="reference" href="#installation-prefix">Installation prefix</a>)</li>
3104 <li><tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/.config/geany/plugins</span></tt></li>
3105 </ul>
3106 <p>Most plugins add menu items to the <em>Tools</em> menu when they are loaded.</p>
3107 <p>Since Geany 0.13, there is a Plugin Manager to let you choose which plugins
3108 should be loaded at startup. You can also load and unload plugins on the
3109 fly using this dialog. Once you click the checkbox for a specific plugin
3110 in the dialog, it is loaded or unloaded according to its previous state.
3111 By default, no plugins are loaded at startup until you select some.
3112 You can also configure some plugin specific options when the plugin
3113 provides some.</p>
3114 <p>See also <a class="reference" href="#plugin-documentation">Plugin documentation</a> for information about single plugins
3115 which are included in Geany.</p>
3116 </div>
3117 <div class="section">
3118 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id148" id="keybindings" name="keybindings">Keybindings</a></h2>
3119 <p>Geany supports the default keyboard shortcuts for the Scintilla
3120 editing widget. For a list of these commands, see <a class="reference" href="#scintilla-keyboard-commands">Scintilla
3121 keyboard commands</a>. The Scintilla keyboard shortcuts will be overridden
3122 by any custom keybindings with the same keyboard shortcut.</p>
3123 <div class="section">
3124 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id149" id="switching-documents" name="switching-documents">Switching documents</a></h3>
3125 <p>There are a few non-configurable bindings to switch between documents,
3126 listed below. These can also be overridden by custom keybindings.</p>
3127 <table border="1" class="docutils">
3128 <colgroup>
3129 <col width="31%" />
3130 <col width="69%" />
3131 </colgroup>
3132 <thead valign="bottom">
3133 <tr><th class="head">Key</th>
3134 <th class="head">Action</th>
3135 </tr>
3136 </thead>
3137 <tbody valign="top">
3138 <tr><td>Alt-[1-9]</td>
3139 <td>Select left-most tab, from 1 to 9.</td>
3140 </tr>
3141 <tr><td>Alt-0</td>
3142 <td>Select right-most tab.</td>
3143 </tr>
3144 <tr><td>Ctrl-Shift-PgUp</td>
3145 <td>Select left-most tab.</td>
3146 </tr>
3147 <tr><td>Ctrl-Shift-PgDn</td>
3148 <td>Select right-most tab.</td>
3149 </tr>
3150 </tbody>
3151 </table>
3152 </div>
3153 <div class="section">
3154 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id150" id="configurable-keybindings" name="configurable-keybindings">Configurable keybindings</a></h3>
3155 <p>For all actions listed below you can define your own keybindings. Open
3156 the Preferences dialog, select the desired action and click on
3157 change. In the resulting dialog you can press the key combination you
3158 want to assign to the action and it will be saved when you press OK.
3159 You can define only one key combination for each action and each key
3160 combination can only be defined for one action.</p>
3161 <p>Some of the default key combinations are common across many
3162 applications, for example <em>Ctrl-N</em> for New and <em>Ctrl-O</em> for Open.
3163 Because they are so common it is not advisable to change these, but
3164 you can add other key combinations for these actions. For example
3165 <em>Ctrl-O</em> is set to execute menu_open by default, but you can also
3166 define <em>Alt-O</em>, so that the file open dialog is shown by pressing
3167 either <em>Ctrl-O</em> or <em>Alt-O</em>.</p>
3168 <p>The following tables list all customizable keyboard shortcuts, those
3169 which are common to many applications are marked with (C) after the
3170 shortcut.</p>
3171 <div class="section">
3172 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id151" id="file-keybindings" name="file-keybindings">File keybindings</a></h4>
3173 <table border="1" class="docutils">
3174 <colgroup>
3175 <col width="29%" />
3176 <col width="24%" />
3177 <col width="47%" />
3178 </colgroup>
3179 <thead valign="bottom">
3180 <tr><th class="head">Action</th>
3181 <th class="head">Default shortcut</th>
3182 <th class="head">Description</th>
3183 </tr>
3184 </thead>
3185 <tbody valign="top">
3186 <tr><td>New</td>
3187 <td>Ctrl-N  (C)</td>
3188 <td>Creates a new file.</td>
3189 </tr>
3190 <tr><td>Open</td>
3191 <td>Ctrl-O  (C)</td>
3192 <td>Opens a file.</td>
3193 </tr>
3194 <tr><td>Open selected file</td>
3195 <td>Ctrl-Shift-O</td>
3196 <td>Opens the selected filename.</td>
3197 </tr>
3198 <tr><td>Re-open last closed tab</td>
3199 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3200 <td>Re-opens the last closed document tab.</td>
3201 </tr>
3202 <tr><td>Save</td>
3203 <td>Ctrl-S  (C)</td>
3204 <td>Saves the current file.</td>
3205 </tr>
3206 <tr><td>Save As</td>
3207 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3208 <td>Saves the current file under a new name.</td>
3209 </tr>
3210 <tr><td>Save all</td>
3211 <td>Ctrl-Shift-S</td>
3212 <td>Saves all open files.</td>
3213 </tr>
3214 <tr><td>Close all</td>
3215 <td>Ctrl-Shift-W</td>
3216 <td>Closes all open files.</td>
3217 </tr>
3218 <tr><td>Close</td>
3219 <td>Ctrl-W  (C)</td>
3220 <td>Closes the current file.</td>
3221 </tr>
3222 <tr><td>Reload file</td>
3223 <td>Ctrl-R  (C)</td>
3224 <td>Reloads the current file. All unsaved changes
3225 will be lost.</td>
3226 </tr>
3227 <tr><td>Print</td>
3228 <td>Ctrl-P  (C)</td>
3229 <td>Prints the current file.</td>
3230 </tr>
3231 </tbody>
3232 </table>
3233 </div>
3234 <div class="section">
3235 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id152" id="editor-keybindings" name="editor-keybindings">Editor keybindings</a></h4>
3236 <table border="1" class="docutils">
3237 <colgroup>
3238 <col width="29%" />
3239 <col width="24%" />
3240 <col width="47%" />
3241 </colgroup>
3242 <thead valign="bottom">
3243 <tr><th class="head">Action</th>
3244 <th class="head">Default shortcut</th>
3245 <th class="head">Description</th>
3246 </tr>
3247 </thead>
3248 <tbody valign="top">
3249 <tr><td>Undo</td>
3250 <td>Ctrl-Z  (C)</td>
3251 <td>Un-does the last action.</td>
3252 </tr>
3253 <tr><td>Redo</td>
3254 <td>Ctrl-Y</td>
3255 <td>Re-does the last action.</td>
3256 </tr>
3257 <tr><td>Delete current line(s)</td>
3258 <td>Ctrl-K</td>
3259 <td>Deletes the current line (and any lines with a
3260 selection).</td>
3261 </tr>
3262 <tr><td>Delete to line end</td>
3263 <td>Ctrl-Shift-Delete</td>
3264 <td>Deletes from the current caret position to the
3265 end of the current line.</td>
3266 </tr>
3267 <tr><td>Duplicate line or selection</td>
3268 <td>Ctrl-D</td>
3269 <td>Duplicates the current line or selection.</td>
3270 </tr>
3271 <tr><td>Transpose current line</td>
3272 <td>Ctrl-T</td>
3273 <td>Transposes the current line with the previous one.</td>
3274 </tr>
3275 <tr><td>Scroll to current line</td>
3276 <td>Ctrl-Shift-L</td>
3277 <td>Scrolls the current line into the centre of the
3278 view. The cursor position and or an existing
3279 selection will not be changed.</td>
3280 </tr>
3281 <tr><td>Scroll up by one line</td>
3282 <td>Alt-Up</td>
3283 <td>Scrolls the view.</td>
3284 </tr>
3285 <tr><td>Scroll down by one line</td>
3286 <td>Alt-Down</td>
3287 <td>Scrolls the view.</td>
3288 </tr>
3289 <tr><td>Complete word</td>
3290 <td>Ctrl-Space</td>
3291 <td>Shows the autocompletion list. If already showing
3292 tag completion, it shows document word completion
3293 instead, even if it is not enabled for automatic
3294 completion. Likewise if no tag suggestions are
3295 available, it shows document word completion.</td>
3296 </tr>
3297 <tr><td>Show calltip</td>
3298 <td>Ctrl-Shift-Space</td>
3299 <td>Shows a calltip for the current function or
3300 method.</td>
3301 </tr>
3302 <tr><td>Show macro list</td>
3303 <td>Ctrl-Return</td>
3304 <td>Shows a list of available macros and variables in
3305 the workspace.</td>
3306 </tr>
3307 <tr><td>Complete snippet</td>
3308 <td>Tab</td>
3309 <td>If you type a construct like if or for and press
3310 this key, it will be completed with a matching
3311 template.</td>
3312 </tr>
3313 <tr><td>Suppress snippet completion</td>
3314 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3315 <td>If you type a construct like if or for and press
3316 this key, it will not be completed, and a space or
3317 tab will be inserted, depending on what the
3318 construct completion keybinding is set to. For
3319 example, if you have set the construct completion
3320 keybinding to space, then setting this to
3321 Shift+space will prevent construct completion and
3322 insert a space.</td>
3323 </tr>
3324 <tr><td>Context Action</td>
3325 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3326 <td>Executes a command and passes the current word
3327 (near the cursor position) or selection as an
3328 argument. See the section called <a class="reference" href="#context-actions">Context
3329 actions</a>.</td>
3330 </tr>
3331 <tr><td>Move cursor in snippet</td>
3332 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3333 <td>Jumps to the next defined cursor positions in a
3334 completed snippets if multiple cursor positions
3335 where defined.</td>
3336 </tr>
3337 <tr><td>Word part completion</td>
3338 <td>Tab</td>
3339 <td>When the autocompletion list is visible, complete
3340 the currently selected item up to the next word
3341 part.</td>
3342 </tr>
3343 <tr><td>Move line(s) up</td>
3344 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3345 <td>Move the current line or selected lines up by
3346 one line.</td>
3347 </tr>
3348 <tr><td>Move line(s) down</td>
3349 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3350 <td>Move the current line or selected lines down by
3351 one line.</td>
3352 </tr>
3353 </tbody>
3354 </table>
3355 </div>
3356 <div class="section">
3357 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id153" id="clipboard-keybindings" name="clipboard-keybindings">Clipboard keybindings</a></h4>
3358 <table border="1" class="docutils">
3359 <colgroup>
3360 <col width="29%" />
3361 <col width="23%" />
3362 <col width="48%" />
3363 </colgroup>
3364 <thead valign="bottom">
3365 <tr><th class="head">Action</th>
3366 <th class="head">Default shortcut</th>
3367 <th class="head">Description</th>
3368 </tr>
3369 </thead>
3370 <tbody valign="top">
3371 <tr><td>Cut</td>
3372 <td>Ctrl-X  (C)</td>
3373 <td>Cut the current selection to the clipboard.</td>
3374 </tr>
3375 <tr><td>Copy</td>
3376 <td>Ctrl-C  (C)</td>
3377 <td>Copy the current selection to the clipboard.</td>
3378 </tr>
3379 <tr><td>Paste</td>
3380 <td>Ctrl-V  (C)</td>
3381 <td>Paste the clipboard text into the current document.</td>
3382 </tr>
3383 <tr><td>Cut current line(s)</td>
3384 <td>Ctrl-Shift-X</td>
3385 <td>Cuts the current line (and any lines with a
3386 selection) to the clipboard.</td>
3387 </tr>
3388 <tr><td>Copy current line(s)</td>
3389 <td>Ctrl-Shift-C</td>
3390 <td>Copies the current line (and any lines with a
3391 selection) to the clipboard.</td>
3392 </tr>
3393 </tbody>
3394 </table>
3395 </div>
3396 <div class="section">
3397 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id154" id="select-keybindings" name="select-keybindings">Select keybindings</a></h4>
3398 <table border="1" class="docutils">
3399 <colgroup>
3400 <col width="29%" />
3401 <col width="24%" />
3402 <col width="47%" />
3403 </colgroup>
3404 <thead valign="bottom">
3405 <tr><th class="head">Action</th>
3406 <th class="head">Default shortcut</th>
3407 <th class="head">Description</th>
3408 </tr>
3409 </thead>
3410 <tbody valign="top">
3411 <tr><td>Select all</td>
3412 <td>Ctrl-A  (C)</td>
3413 <td>Makes a selection of all text in the current
3414 document.</td>
3415 </tr>
3416 <tr><td>Select current word</td>
3417 <td>Alt-Shift-W</td>
3418 <td>Selects the current word under the cursor.</td>
3419 </tr>
3420 <tr><td>Select current paragraph</td>
3421 <td>Alt-Shift-P</td>
3422 <td>Selects the current paragraph under the cursor
3423 which is defined by two empty lines around it.</td>
3424 </tr>
3425 <tr><td>Select current line(s)</td>
3426 <td>Alt-Shift-L</td>
3427 <td>Selects the current line under the cursor (and any
3428 partially selected lines).</td>
3429 </tr>
3430 <tr><td>Select to previous word part</td>
3431 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3432 <td>(Extend) selection to previous word part boundary.</td>
3433 </tr>
3434 <tr><td>Select to next word part</td>
3435 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3436 <td>(Extend) selection to next word part boundary.</td>
3437 </tr>
3438 </tbody>
3439 </table>
3440 </div>
3441 <div class="section">
3442 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id155" id="insert-keybindings" name="insert-keybindings">Insert keybindings</a></h4>
3443 <table border="1" class="docutils">
3444 <colgroup>
3445 <col width="29%" />
3446 <col width="24%" />
3447 <col width="47%" />
3448 </colgroup>
3449 <thead valign="bottom">
3450 <tr><th class="head">Action</th>
3451 <th class="head">Default shortcut</th>
3452 <th class="head">Description</th>
3453 </tr>
3454 </thead>
3455 <tbody valign="top">
3456 <tr><td>Insert date</td>
3457 <td>Shift-Alt-D</td>
3458 <td>Inserts a customisable date.</td>
3459 </tr>
3460 <tr><td>Insert alternative whitespace</td>
3461 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3462 <td>Inserts a tab character when spaces should
3463 be used for indentation and inserts space
3464 characters of the amount of a tab width when
3465 tabs should be used for indentation.</td>
3466 </tr>
3467 </tbody>
3468 </table>
3469 </div>
3470 <div class="section">
3471 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id156" id="format-keybindings" name="format-keybindings">Format keybindings</a></h4>
3472 <table border="1" class="docutils">
3473 <colgroup>
3474 <col width="29%" />
3475 <col width="24%" />
3476 <col width="47%" />
3477 </colgroup>
3478 <thead valign="bottom">
3479 <tr><th class="head">Action</th>
3480 <th class="head">Default shortcut</th>
3481 <th class="head">Description</th>
3482 </tr>
3483 </thead>
3484 <tbody valign="top">
3485 <tr><td>Toggle case of selection</td>
3486 <td>Ctrl-Alt-U</td>
3487 <td>Changes the case of the selection. A lowercase
3488 selection will be changed into uppercase and vice
3489 versa. If the selection contains lower- and
3490 uppercase characters, all will be converted to
3491 lowercase.</td>
3492 </tr>
3493 <tr><td>Comment line</td>
3494 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3495 <td>Comments current line or selection.</td>
3496 </tr>
3497 <tr><td>Uncomment line</td>
3498 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3499 <td>Uncomments current line or selection.</td>
3500 </tr>
3501 <tr><td>Toggle line commentation</td>
3502 <td>Ctrl-E</td>
3503 <td>Comments a line if it is not commented or removes
3504 a comment if the line is commented.</td>
3505 </tr>
3506 <tr><td>Increase indent</td>
3507 <td>Ctrl-I</td>
3508 <td>Indents the current line or selection by one tab
3509 or by spaces in the amount of the tab width
3510 setting.</td>
3511 </tr>
3512 <tr><td>Decrease indent</td>
3513 <td>Ctrl-U</td>
3514 <td>Removes one tab or the amount of spaces of
3515 the tab width setting from the indentation of the
3516 current line or selection.</td>
3517 </tr>
3518 <tr><td>Increase indent by one space</td>
3519 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3520 <td>Indents the current line or selection by one
3521 space.</td>
3522 </tr>
3523 <tr><td>Decrease indent by one space</td>
3524 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3525 <td>Deindents the current line or selection by one
3526 space.</td>
3527 </tr>
3528 <tr><td>Smart line indent</td>
3529 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3530 <td>Indents the current line or all selected lines
3531 with the same indentation as the previous line.</td>
3532 </tr>
3533 <tr><td>Send to Custom Command 1 (2,3)</td>
3534 <td>Ctrl-1 (2,3)</td>
3535 <td>Passes the current selection to a configured
3536 external command (available for the first
3537 three configured commands, see
3538 <a class="reference" href="#sending-text-through-custom-commands">Sending text through custom commands</a> for
3539 details).</td>
3540 </tr>
3541 <tr><td>Send Selection to Terminal</td>
3542 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3543 <td>Sends the current selection or the current
3544 line (if there is no selection) to the
3545 embedded Terminal (VTE).</td>
3546 </tr>
3547 <tr><td>Reflow lines/block</td>
3548 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3549 <td>Reformat selected lines or current
3550 (indented) text block,
3551 breaking lines at the long line marker or the
3552 line breaking column if line breaking is
3553 enabled for the current document.</td>
3554 </tr>
3555 </tbody>
3556 </table>
3557 </div>
3558 <div class="section">
3559 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id157" id="settings-keybindings" name="settings-keybindings">Settings keybindings</a></h4>
3560 <table border="1" class="docutils">
3561 <colgroup>
3562 <col width="29%" />
3563 <col width="24%" />
3564 <col width="47%" />
3565 </colgroup>
3566 <thead valign="bottom">
3567 <tr><th class="head">Action</th>
3568 <th class="head">Default shortcut</th>
3569 <th class="head">Description</th>
3570 </tr>
3571 </thead>
3572 <tbody valign="top">
3573 <tr><td>Preferences</td>
3574 <td>Ctrl-Alt-P</td>
3575 <td>Opens preferences dialog.</td>
3576 </tr>
3577 <tr><td>Plugin Preferences</td>
3578 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3579 <td>Opens plugin preferences dialog.</td>
3580 </tr>
3581 </tbody>
3582 </table>
3583 </div>
3584 <div class="section">
3585 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id158" id="search-keybindings" name="search-keybindings">Search keybindings</a></h4>
3586 <table border="1" class="docutils">
3587 <colgroup>
3588 <col width="29%" />
3589 <col width="24%" />
3590 <col width="47%" />
3591 </colgroup>
3592 <thead valign="bottom">
3593 <tr><th class="head">Action</th>
3594 <th class="head">Default shortcut</th>
3595 <th class="head">Description</th>
3596 </tr>
3597 </thead>
3598 <tbody valign="top">
3599 <tr><td>Find</td>
3600 <td>Ctrl-F  (C)</td>
3601 <td>Opens the Find dialog.</td>
3602 </tr>
3603 <tr><td>Find Next</td>
3604 <td>Ctrl-G</td>
3605 <td>Finds next result.</td>
3606 </tr>
3607 <tr><td>Find Previous</td>
3608 <td>Ctrl-Shift-G</td>
3609 <td>Finds previous result.</td>
3610 </tr>
3611 <tr><td>Replace</td>
3612 <td>Ctrl-H  (C)</td>
3613 <td>Opens the Replace dialog.</td>
3614 </tr>
3615 <tr><td>Find in files</td>
3616 <td>Ctrl-Shift-F</td>
3617 <td>Opens the Find in files dialog.</td>
3618 </tr>
3619 <tr><td>Next message</td>
3620 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3621 <td>Jumps to the line with the next message in
3622 the Messages window.</td>
3623 </tr>
3624 <tr><td>Previous message</td>
3625 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3626 <td>Jumps to the line with the previous message
3627 in the Messages window.</td>
3628 </tr>
3629 <tr><td>Find Usage</td>
3630 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3631 <td>Finds all occurrences of the current word (near
3632 the keyboard cursor) or selection in all open
3633 documents and displays them in the messages
3634 window.</td>
3635 </tr>
3636 <tr><td>Find Document Usage</td>
3637 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3638 <td>Finds all occurrences of the current word (near
3639 the keyboard cursor) or selection in the current
3640 document and displays them in the messages
3641 window.</td>
3642 </tr>
3643 <tr><td>Mark All</td>
3644 <td>Ctrl-Shift-M</td>
3645 <td>Highlight all matches of the current
3646 word/selection in the current document
3647 with a colored box. If there's nothing to
3648 find, highlighted matches will be cleared.</td>
3649 </tr>
3650 </tbody>
3651 </table>
3652 </div>
3653 <div class="section">
3654 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id159" id="go-to-keybindings" name="go-to-keybindings">Go to keybindings</a></h4>
3655 <table border="1" class="docutils">
3656 <colgroup>
3657 <col width="29%" />
3658 <col width="24%" />
3659 <col width="47%" />
3660 </colgroup>
3661 <thead valign="bottom">
3662 <tr><th class="head">Action</th>
3663 <th class="head">Default shortcut</th>
3664 <th class="head">Description</th>
3665 </tr>
3666 </thead>
3667 <tbody valign="top">
3668 <tr><td>Navigate forward a location</td>
3669 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3670 <td>Switches to the next location in the navigation
3671 history. See the section called <a class="reference" href="#code-navigation-history">Code Navigation
3672 History</a>.</td>
3673 </tr>
3674 <tr><td>Navigate back a location</td>
3675 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3676 <td>Switches to the previous location in the
3677 navigation history. See the section called
3678 <a class="reference" href="#code-navigation-history">Code navigation history</a>.</td>
3679 </tr>
3680 <tr><td>Go to line</td>
3681 <td>Ctrl-L</td>
3682 <td>Focuses the Go to Line entry (if visible) or
3683 shows the Go to line dialog.</td>
3684 </tr>
3685 <tr><td>Goto matching brace</td>
3686 <td>Ctrl-B</td>
3687 <td>If the cursor is ahead or behind a brace, then it
3688 is moved to the brace which belongs to the current
3689 one. If this keyboard shortcut is pressed again,
3690 the cursor is moved back to the first brace.</td>
3691 </tr>
3692 <tr><td>Toggle marker</td>
3693 <td>Ctrl-M</td>
3694 <td>Set a marker on the current line, or clear the
3695 marker if there already is one.</td>
3696 </tr>
3697 <tr><td>Goto next marker</td>
3698 <td>Ctrl-.</td>
3699 <td>Goto the next marker in the current document.</td>
3700 </tr>
3701 <tr><td>Goto previous marker</td>
3702 <td>Ctrl-,</td>
3703 <td>Goto the previous marker in the current document.</td>
3704 </tr>
3705 <tr><td>Go to tag definition</td>
3706 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3707 <td>Jump to the definition of the current word (near
3708 the keyboard cursor). If the definition cannot be
3709 found (e.g. the relevant file is not open) Geany
3710 will beep and do nothing. See the section called
3711 <a class="reference" href="#go-to-tag-definition">Go to tag definition</a>.</td>
3712 </tr>
3713 <tr><td>Go to tag declaration</td>
3714 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3715 <td>Jump to the declaration of the current word (near
3716 the keyboard cursor). If the declaration cannot be
3717 found (e.g. the relevant file is not open) Geany
3718 will beep and do nothing. See the section called
3719 <a class="reference" href="#go-to-tag-declaration">Go to tag declaration</a>.</td>
3720 </tr>
3721 <tr><td>Go to Start of Line</td>
3722 <td>Home</td>
3723 <td>Move the caret to the end of the line indentation
3724 unless it is already there, in which case it moves
3725 it to the start of the line.</td>
3726 </tr>
3727 <tr><td>Go to End of Line</td>
3728 <td>End</td>
3729 <td>Move the caret to the end of the line.</td>
3730 </tr>
3731 <tr><td>Go to End of Display Line</td>
3732 <td>Alt-End</td>
3733 <td>Move the caret to the end of the display line.
3734 This is useful when you use line wrapping and
3735 want to jump to the end of the wrapped, virtual
3736 line, not the real end of the whole line.
3737 If the line is not wrapped, it behaves like
3738 <cite>Go to End of Line</cite>, see above.</td>
3739 </tr>
3740 <tr><td>Go to Previous Word Part</td>
3741 <td>Ctrl-/</td>
3742 <td>Goto the previous part of the current word.</td>
3743 </tr>
3744 <tr><td>Go to Next Word Part</td>
3745 <td>Ctrl-</td>
3746 <td>Goto the next part of the current word.</td>
3747 </tr>
3748 </tbody>
3749 </table>
3750 </div>
3751 <div class="section">
3752 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id160" id="view-keybindings" name="view-keybindings">View keybindings</a></h4>
3753 <table border="1" class="docutils">
3754 <colgroup>
3755 <col width="29%" />
3756 <col width="24%" />
3757 <col width="47%" />
3758 </colgroup>
3759 <thead valign="bottom">
3760 <tr><th class="head">Action</th>
3761 <th class="head">Default shortcut</th>
3762 <th class="head">Description</th>
3763 </tr>
3764 </thead>
3765 <tbody valign="top">
3766 <tr><td>Fullscreen</td>
3767 <td>F11  (C)</td>
3768 <td>Switches to fullscreen mode.</td>
3769 </tr>
3770 <tr><td>Toggle Messages Window</td>
3771 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3772 <td>Toggles the message window (status and compiler
3773 messages) on and off.</td>
3774 </tr>
3775 <tr><td>Toggle Sidebar</td>
3776 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3777 <td>Shows or hides the sidebar.</td>
3778 </tr>
3779 <tr><td>Toggle all additional widgets</td>
3780 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3781 <td>Hide and show all additional widgets like the
3782 notebook tabs, the toolbar, the messages window
3783 and the status bar.</td>
3784 </tr>
3785 <tr><td>Zoom In</td>
3786 <td>Ctrl-+  (C)</td>
3787 <td>Zooms in the text.</td>
3788 </tr>
3789 <tr><td>Zoom Out</td>
3790 <td>Ctrl--  (C)</td>
3791 <td>Zooms out the text.</td>
3792 </tr>
3793 <tr><td>Zoom Reset</td>
3794 <td>Ctrl-0</td>
3795 <td>Reset any previous zoom on the text.</td>
3796 </tr>
3797 </tbody>
3798 </table>
3799 </div>
3800 <div class="section">
3801 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id161" id="focus-keybindings" name="focus-keybindings">Focus keybindings</a></h4>
3802 <table border="1" class="docutils">
3803 <colgroup>
3804 <col width="30%" />
3805 <col width="23%" />
3806 <col width="47%" />
3807 </colgroup>
3808 <thead valign="bottom">
3809 <tr><th class="head">Action</th>
3810 <th class="head">Default shortcut</th>
3811 <th class="head">Description</th>
3812 </tr>
3813 </thead>
3814 <tbody valign="top">
3815 <tr><td>Switch to Editor</td>
3816 <td>F2</td>
3817 <td>Switches to editor widget.
3818 Also reshows the document statistics line
3819 (after a short timeout).</td>
3820 </tr>
3821 <tr><td>Switch to Scribble</td>
3822 <td>F6</td>
3823 <td>Switches to scribble widget.</td>
3824 </tr>
3825 <tr><td>Switch to VTE</td>
3826 <td>F4</td>
3827 <td>Switches to VTE widget.</td>
3828 </tr>
3829 <tr><td>Switch to Search Bar</td>
3830 <td>F7</td>
3831 <td>Switches to the search bar in the toolbar (if
3832 visible).</td>
3833 </tr>
3834 <tr><td>Switch to Sidebar</td>
3835 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3836 <td>Focus the Sidebar.</td>
3837 </tr>
3838 <tr><td>Switch to Compiler</td>
3839 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3840 <td>Focus the Compiler message window tab.</td>
3841 </tr>
3842 <tr><td>Switch to Messages</td>
3843 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3844 <td>Focus the Messages message window tab.</td>
3845 </tr>
3846 <tr><td>Switch to Message Window</td>
3847 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3848 <td>Focus the Message Window's current tab.</td>
3849 </tr>
3850 <tr><td>Switch to Sidebar Document List</td>
3851 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3852 <td>Focus the Document list tab in the Sidebar
3853 (if visible).</td>
3854 </tr>
3855 <tr><td>Switch to Sidebar Symbol List</td>
3856 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3857 <td>Focus the Symbol list tab in the Sidebar
3858 (if visible).</td>
3859 </tr>
3860 </tbody>
3861 </table>
3862 </div>
3863 <div class="section">
3864 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id162" id="notebook-tab-keybindings" name="notebook-tab-keybindings">Notebook tab keybindings</a></h4>
3865 <table border="1" class="docutils">
3866 <colgroup>
3867 <col width="28%" />
3868 <col width="23%" />
3869 <col width="49%" />
3870 </colgroup>
3871 <thead valign="bottom">
3872 <tr><th class="head">Action</th>
3873 <th class="head">Default shortcut</th>
3874 <th class="head">Description</th>
3875 </tr>
3876 </thead>
3877 <tbody valign="top">
3878 <tr><td>Switch to left document</td>
3879 <td>Ctrl-PageUp   (C)</td>
3880 <td>Switches to the previous open document.</td>
3881 </tr>
3882 <tr><td>Switch to right document</td>
3883 <td>Ctrl-PageDown (C)</td>
3884 <td>Switches to the next open document.</td>
3885 </tr>
3886 <tr><td>Switch to last used document</td>
3887 <td>Ctrl-Tab</td>
3888 <td>Switches to the previously shown document (if it's
3889 still open).
3890 Holding Ctrl (or another modifier if the keybinding
3891 has been changed) will show a dialog, then repeated
3892 presses of the keybinding will switch to the 2nd-last
3893 used document, 3rd-last, etc. Also known as
3894 Most-Recently-Used documents switching.</td>
3895 </tr>
3896 <tr><td>Move document left</td>
3897 <td>Alt-PageUp</td>
3898 <td>Changes the current document with the left hand
3899 one.</td>
3900 </tr>
3901 <tr><td>Move document right</td>
3902 <td>Alt-PageDown</td>
3903 <td>Changes the current document with the right hand
3904 one.</td>
3905 </tr>
3906 <tr><td>Move document first</td>
3907 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3908 <td>Moves the current document to the first position.</td>
3909 </tr>
3910 <tr><td>Move document last</td>
3911 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3912 <td>Moves the current document to the last position.</td>
3913 </tr>
3914 </tbody>
3915 </table>
3916 </div>
3917 <div class="section">
3918 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id163" id="document-keybindings" name="document-keybindings">Document keybindings</a></h4>
3919 <table border="1" class="docutils">
3920 <colgroup>
3921 <col width="29%" />
3922 <col width="23%" />
3923 <col width="48%" />
3924 </colgroup>
3925 <thead valign="bottom">
3926 <tr><th class="head">Action</th>
3927 <th class="head">Default shortcut</th>
3928 <th class="head">Description</th>
3929 </tr>
3930 </thead>
3931 <tbody valign="top">
3932 <tr><td>Replace tabs by space</td>
3933 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3934 <td>Replaces all tabs with the right amount of spaces.</td>
3935 </tr>
3936 <tr><td>Replace spaces by tabs</td>
3937 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3938 <td>Replaces all spaces with tab characters.</td>
3939 </tr>
3940 <tr><td>Toggle current fold</td>
3941 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3942 <td>Toggles the folding state of the current code block.</td>
3943 </tr>
3944 <tr><td>Fold all</td>
3945 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3946 <td>Folds all contractible code blocks.</td>
3947 </tr>
3948 <tr><td>Unfold all</td>
3949 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3950 <td>Unfolds all contracted code blocks.</td>
3951 </tr>
3952 <tr><td>Reload symbol list</td>
3953 <td>Ctrl-Shift-R</td>
3954 <td>Reloads the tag/symbol list.</td>
3955 </tr>
3956 <tr><td>Toggle Line wrapping</td>
3957 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3958 <td>Enables or disables wrapping of long lines.</td>
3959 </tr>
3960 <tr><td>Toggle Line breaking</td>
3961 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3962 <td>Enables or disables automatic breaking of long
3963 lines at a configurable column.</td>
3964 </tr>
3965 <tr><td>Remove Markers</td>
3966 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3967 <td>Remove any markers on lines or words which
3968 were set by using 'Mark All' in the
3969 search dialog or by manually marking lines.</td>
3970 </tr>
3971 <tr><td>Remove Error Indicators</td>
3972 <td>&nbsp;</td>
3973 <td>Remove any error indicators in the
3974 current document.</td>
3975 </tr>
3976 </tbody>
3977 </table>
3978 </div>
3979 <div class="section">
3980 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id164" id="build-keybindings" name="build-keybindings">Build keybindings</a></h4>
3981 <table border="1" class="docutils">
3982 <colgroup>
3983 <col width="29%" />
3984 <col width="24%" />
3985 <col width="47%" />
3986 </colgroup>
3987 <thead valign="bottom">
3988 <tr><th class="head">Action</th>
3989 <th class="head">Default shortcut</th>
3990 <th class="head">Description</th>
3991 </tr>
3992 </thead>
3993 <tbody valign="top">
3994 <tr><td>Compile</td>
3995 <td>F8</td>
3996 <td>Compiles the current file.</td>
3997 </tr>
3998 <tr><td>Build</td>
3999 <td>F9</td>
4000 <td>Builds (compiles if necessary and links) the
4001 current file.</td>
4002 </tr>
4003 <tr><td>Make all</td>
4004 <td>Shift-F9</td>
4005 <td>Builds the current file with the Make tool.</td>
4006 </tr>
4007 <tr><td>Make custom target</td>
4008 <td>Ctrl-Shift-F9</td>
4009 <td>Builds the current file with the Make tool and a
4010 given target.</td>
4011 </tr>
4012 <tr><td>Make object</td>
4013 <td>&nbsp;</td>
4014 <td>Compiles the current file with the Make tool.</td>
4015 </tr>
4016 <tr><td>Next error</td>
4017 <td>&nbsp;</td>
4018 <td>Jumps to the line with the next error from the
4019 last build process.</td>
4020 </tr>
4021 <tr><td>Previous error</td>
4022 <td>&nbsp;</td>
4023 <td>Jumps to the line with the previous error from
4024 the last build process.</td>
4025 </tr>
4026 <tr><td>Run</td>
4027 <td>F5</td>
4028 <td>Executes the current file in a terminal emulation.</td>
4029 </tr>
4030 <tr><td>Set Build Commands</td>
4031 <td>&nbsp;</td>
4032 <td>Opens the build commands dialog.</td>
4033 </tr>
4034 </tbody>
4035 </table>
4036 </div>
4037 <div class="section">
4038 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id165" id="tools-keybindings" name="tools-keybindings">Tools keybindings</a></h4>
4039 <table border="1" class="docutils">
4040 <colgroup>
4041 <col width="29%" />
4042 <col width="24%" />
4043 <col width="47%" />
4044 </colgroup>
4045 <thead valign="bottom">
4046 <tr><th class="head">Action</th>
4047 <th class="head">Default shortcut</th>
4048 <th class="head">Description</th>
4049 </tr>
4050 </thead>
4051 <tbody valign="top">
4052 <tr><td>Show Color Chooser</td>
4053 <td>&nbsp;</td>
4054 <td>Opens the Color Chooser dialog.</td>
4055 </tr>
4056 </tbody>
4057 </table>
4058 </div>
4059 <div class="section">
4060 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id166" id="help-keybindings" name="help-keybindings">Help keybindings</a></h4>
4061 <table border="1" class="docutils">
4062 <colgroup>
4063 <col width="29%" />
4064 <col width="24%" />
4065 <col width="47%" />
4066 </colgroup>
4067 <thead valign="bottom">
4068 <tr><th class="head">Action</th>
4069 <th class="head">Default shortcut</th>
4070 <th class="head">Description</th>
4071 </tr>
4072 </thead>
4073 <tbody valign="top">
4074 <tr><td>Help</td>
4075 <td>F1 (C)</td>
4076 <td>Opens the manual.</td>
4077 </tr>
4078 </tbody>
4079 </table>
4080 </div>
4081 </div>
4082 </div>
4083 </div>
4084 <div class="section">
4085 <h1><a class="toc-backref" href="#id167" id="id4" name="id4">Configuration files</a></h1>
4086 <div class="warning">
4087 <p class="first admonition-title">Warning</p>
4088 <p class="last">You must use UTF-8 encoding <em>without BOM</em> for configuration files.</p>
4089 </div>
4090 <div class="section">
4091 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id168" id="tools-menu-items" name="tools-menu-items">Tools menu items</a></h2>
4092 <p>There's a <em>Configuration files</em> submenu in the <em>Tools</em> menu that
4093 contains items for some of the available user configuration files.
4094 Clicking on one opens it in the editor for you to update. Geany will
4095 reload the file after you have saved it.</p>
4096 <div class="note">
4097 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
4098 <p class="last">Other configuration files not shown here will need to be opened
4099 manually, and will not be automatically reloaded when saved.
4100 (see <em>Reload Configuration</em> below).</p>
4101 </div>
4102 <p>There's also a <em>Reload Configuration</em> item which can be used if you
4103 updated one of the other configuration files, or modified or added
4104 template files.</p>
4105 <p><em>Reload Configuration</em> is also necessary to update syntax highlighting colors.</p>
4106 <div class="note">
4107 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
4108 <p class="last">Syntax highlighting colors aren't updated in open documents after
4109 saving filetypes.common as this can possibly take a significant
4110 amount of time.</p>
4111 </div>
4112 </div>
4113 <div class="section">
4114 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id169" id="global-configuration-file" name="global-configuration-file">Global configuration file</a></h2>
4115 <p>There is a global configuration file for Geany which will be used for
4116 any settings not defined in the users local configuration file.
4117 Settings present in the local configuration file override those in the global
4118 file.</p>
4119 <p>The global configuration file is read from
4120 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix/share/geany/geany.conf</span></tt> (where <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix</span></tt> is the path where
4121 Geany is installed, see <a class="reference" href="#installation-prefix">Installation prefix</a>) when starting Geany and
4122 an user configuration file does not exist. It can contain any settings
4123 which are found in the usual configuration file created by Geany but
4124 does not have to contain all settings.</p>
4125 <div class="note">
4126 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
4127 <p class="last">This feature is mainly intended for package maintainers or system
4128 admins who want to set up Geany in a multi user environment and
4129 set some sane default values for this environment. Usually users won't
4130 need to do that.</p>
4131 </div>
4132 </div>
4133 <div class="section">
4134 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id170" id="filetype-definition-files" name="filetype-definition-files">Filetype definition files</a></h2>
4135 <p>All color definitions and other filetype specific settings are
4136 stored in the filetype definition files. Those settings are colors
4137 for syntax highlighting, general settings like comment characters or
4138 word delimiter characters as well as compiler and linker settings.</p>
4139 <div class="section">
4140 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id171" id="custom-filetypes" name="custom-filetypes">Custom filetypes</a></h3>
4141 <p>At startup Geany looks for <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">filetypes.*.conf</span></tt> files in the system and
4142 user filetype paths, adding any filetypes found with the name matching
4143 the '<tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">*</span></tt>' wildcard.</p>
4144 <p>Custom filetypes are not as powerful as built-in filetypes, but the following
4145 have been implemented:</p>
4146 <ul>
4147 <li><p class="first">Recognizing and setting the filetype (after the user has manually edited
4148 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">filetype_extensions.conf</span></tt>).</p>
4149 </li>
4150 <li><dl class="first docutils">
4151 <dt>Filetype settings in the [settings] section (see <a class="reference" href="#format">Format</a>).</dt>
4152 <dd><ul class="first last simple">
4153 <li>Using existing tag parsing (<tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">tag_parser</span></tt> key).</li>
4154 <li>Using existing syntax highlighting (<tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">lexer_filetype</span></tt> key).</li>
4155 </ul>
4156 </dd>
4157 </dl>
4158 </li>
4159 <li><p class="first">Build commands.</p>
4160 </li>
4161 <li><p class="first">Loading global tags files (namespace will be shared with tag_parser
4162 type).</p>
4163 </li>
4164 </ul>
4165 </div>
4166 <div class="section">
4167 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id172" id="system-files" name="system-files">System files</a></h3>
4168 <p>The system-wide configuration files can be found in
4169 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix/share/geany</span></tt> and are called <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">filetypes.$ext</span></tt>,
4170 where <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix</span></tt> is the path where Geany is installed (see
4171 <a class="reference" href="#installation-prefix">Installation prefix</a>) and $ext is the name of the filetype. For every
4172 filetype there is a corresponding definition file. There is one
4173 exception: <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">filetypes.common</span></tt> -- this file is for general settings,
4174 which are not specific to a certain filetype.</p>
4175 <div class="warning">
4176 <p class="first admonition-title">Warning</p>
4177 <p class="last">It is not recommended that users edit the system-wide files,
4178 because they will be overridden when Geany is updated.</p>
4179 </div>
4180 </div>
4181 <div class="section">
4182 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id173" id="user-files" name="user-files">User files</a></h3>
4183 <p>To change the settings, copy a file from <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix/share/geany</span></tt> to
4184 the subdirectory filedefs in your configuration directory (usually
4185 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/.config/geany/</span></tt>).</p>
4186 <p>For example:</p>
4187 <pre class="literal-block">
4188 % cp /usr/local/share/geany/filetypes.c /home/username/.config/geany/filedefs/
4189 </pre>
4190 <p>Then you can edit the file and the changes are also
4191 available after an update of Geany because they reside in your
4192 configuration directory. Alternatively, you can create a file
4193 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/.config/geany/filedefs/filetypes.X</span></tt> and add only these settings you want
4194 to change. All missing settings will be read from the corresponding
4195 global definition file in <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix/share/geany</span></tt>.</p>
4196 <p>As well as the sections listed below, each filetype file can contain
4197 a [build-menu] section as described in <a class="reference" href="#build-menu-section">[build-menu] Section</a>.</p>
4198 </div>
4199 <div class="section">
4200 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id174" id="format" name="format">Format</a></h3>
4201 <div class="section">
4202 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id175" id="styling-section" name="styling-section">[styling] Section</a></h4>
4203 <p>In this section the colors for syntax highlighting are defined. The
4204 manual format is:</p>
4205 <ul class="simple">
4206 <li><tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">key=foreground_color;background_color;bold_flag;italic_flag</span></tt></li>
4207 </ul>
4208 <p>Colors have to be specified as RGB hex values prefixed by
4209 0x. For example red is 0xff0000, blue is 0x0000ff. The values are
4210 case-insensitive, but it is a good idea to use small letters. Bold
4211 and italic are flags and should only be &quot;true&quot; or &quot;false&quot;. If their
4212 value is something other than &quot;true&quot; or &quot;false&quot;, &quot;false&quot; is assumed.</p>
4213 <p>You can omit fields to use the values from the style named <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">&quot;default&quot;</span></tt>.</p>
4214 <p>E.g. <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">key=0xff0000;;true</span></tt></p>
4215 <p>This makes the key style have red foreground text, default background
4216 color text and bold emphasis.</p>
4217 <div class="section">
4218 <h5><a class="toc-backref" href="#id176" id="using-a-named-style" name="using-a-named-style">Using a named style</a></h5>
4219 <p>The second format uses a <em>named style</em> name to reference a style
4220 defined in filetypes.common.</p>
4221 <ul class="simple">
4222 <li><tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">key=named_style</span></tt></li>
4223 <li><tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">key2=named_style2,bold,italic</span></tt></li>
4224 </ul>
4225 <p>The bold and italic parts are optional, and if present are used to
4226 toggle the bold or italic flags to the opposite of the named style's
4227 flags. In contrast to style definition booleans, they are a literal
4228 &quot;,bold,italic&quot; and commas are used instead of semi-colons.</p>
4229 <p>E.g. <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">key=comment,italic</span></tt></p>
4230 <p>This makes the key style match the <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">&quot;comment&quot;</span></tt> named style, but with
4231 italic emphasis.</p>
4232 <p>To define named styles, see the filetypes.common <a class="reference" href="#named-styles-section">[named_styles]
4233 Section</a>.</p>
4234 </div>
4235 </div>
4236 <div class="section">
4237 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id177" id="keywords-section" name="keywords-section">[keywords] Section</a></h4>
4238 <p>This section contains keys for different keyword lists specific to
4239 the filetype. Some filetypes do not support keywords, so adding a
4240 new key will not work. You can only add or remove keywords to/from
4241 an existing list.</p>
4242 <div class="important">
4243 <p class="first admonition-title">Important</p>
4244 <p class="last">The keywords list must be in one line without line ending characters.</p>
4245 </div>
4246 </div>
4247 <div class="section">
4248 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id178" id="lexer-properties-section" name="lexer-properties-section">[lexer_properties] Section</a></h4>
4249 <p>Here any special properties for the Scintilla lexer can be set in the
4250 format <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">key.name.field=some.value</span></tt>.</p>
4251 </div>
4252 <div class="section">
4253 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id179" id="settings-section" name="settings-section">[settings] Section</a></h4>
4254 <dl class="docutils">
4255 <dt>extension</dt>
4256 <dd><p class="first">This is the default file extension used when saving files, not
4257 including the period character (<tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">.</span></tt>). The extension used should
4258 match one of the patterns associated with that filetype (see
4259 <a class="reference" href="#filetype-extensions">Filetype extensions</a>).</p>
4260 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">extension=cxx</span></tt></p>
4261 </dd>
4262 <dt>wordchars</dt>
4263 <dd><p class="first">These characters define word boundaries when making selections
4264 and searching using word matching options.</p>
4265 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> (look at system filetypes.* files)</p>
4266 </dd>
4267 <dt>comment_open</dt>
4268 <dd><p class="first">A character or string which is used to comment code. If you want to
4269 use multiline comments, also set comment_close, otherwise leave it
4270 empty.</p>
4271 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">comment_open=/*</span></tt></p>
4272 </dd>
4273 <dt>comment_close</dt>
4274 <dd><p class="first">If multiline comments are used, this is the character or string to
4275 close the comment.</p>
4276 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">comment_close=*/</span></tt></p>
4277 </dd>
4278 <dt>comment_use_indent</dt>
4279 <dd><p class="first">Set this to false if a comment character or string should start at
4280 column 0 of a line. If set to true it uses any indentation of the
4281 line.</p>
4282 <p>Note: Comment indentation</p>
4283 <p><tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">comment_use_indent=true</span></tt> would generate this if a line is
4284 commented (e.g. with Ctrl-D):</p>
4285 <pre class="literal-block">
4286 #command_example();
4287 </pre>
4288 <p><tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">comment_use_indent=false</span></tt> would generate this if a line is
4289 commented (e.g. with Ctrl-D):</p>
4290 <pre class="literal-block">
4291 #   command_example();
4292 </pre>
4293 <p>Note: This setting only works for single line comments (like '//',
4294 '#' or ';').</p>
4295 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">comment_use_indent=true</span></tt></p>
4296 </dd>
4297 <dt>context_action_cmd</dt>
4298 <dd><p class="first">A command which can be executed on the current word or the current
4299 selection.</p>
4300 <p>Example usage: Open the API documentation for the
4301 current function call at the cursor position.</p>
4302 <p>The command can
4303 be set for every filetype or if not set, a global command will
4304 be used. The command itself can be specified without the full
4305 path, then it is searched in $PATH. But for security reasons,
4306 it is recommended to specify the full path to the command. The
4307 wildcard %s will be replaced by the current word at the cursor
4308 position or by the current selection.</p>
4309 <p>Hint: for PHP files the following could be quite useful:
4310 context_action_cmd=firefox &quot;<a class="reference" href="http://www.php.net/%s">http://www.php.net/%s</a>&quot;</p>
4311 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">context_action_cmd=devhelp</span> <span class="pre">-s</span> <span class="pre">&quot;%s&quot;</span></tt></p>
4312 </dd>
4313 <dt>tag_parser</dt>
4314 <dd>The TagManager language name, e.g. &quot;C&quot;.</dd>
4315 <dt>lexer_filetype</dt>
4316 <dd>A filetype name to setup syntax highlighting from another filetype.
4317 This must not be recursive, i.e. it should be a filetype name that
4318 doesn't use the lexer_filetype key itself.</dd>
4319 </dl>
4320 </div>
4321 <div class="section">
4322 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id180" id="build-settings-section" name="build-settings-section">[build_settings] Section</a></h4>
4323 <p>As of Geany 0.19 this section is supplemented by the <a class="reference" href="#build-menu-section">[build-menu] Section</a>.
4324 Values that are set in the [build-menu] section will override those in this section.</p>
4325 <dl class="docutils">
4326 <dt>error_regex</dt>
4327 <dd><p class="first">This is a GNU-style extended regular expression to parse a filename
4328 and line number from build output. If undefined, Geany will fall
4329 back to its default error message parsing.</p>
4330 <p>Only the first two matches will be read by Geany. Geany will look for
4331 a match that is purely digits, and use this for the line number. The
4332 remaining match will be used as the filename.</p>
4333 <p><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">error_regex=(.+):([0-9]+):[0-9]+</span></tt></p>
4334 <p class="last">This will parse a message such as:
4335 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">test.py:7:24:</span> <span class="pre">E202</span> <span class="pre">whitespace</span> <span class="pre">before</span> <span class="pre">']'</span></tt></p>
4336 </dd>
4337 </dl>
4338 <p><strong>Build commands</strong></p>
4339 <p>If any build menu item settings have been configured in the Build Menu Commands
4340 dialog or the Build tab of the project preferences dialog then these
4341 settings are stored in the [build-menu] section and override the settings in
4342 this section for that item.</p>
4343 <dl class="docutils">
4344 <dt>compiler</dt>
4345 <dd><p class="first">This item specifies the command to compile source code files. But
4346 it is also possible to use it with interpreted languages like Perl
4347 or Python. With these filetypes you can use this option as a kind of
4348 syntax parser, which sends output to the compiler message window.</p>
4349 <p>You should quote the filename to also support filenames with
4350 spaces. The following wildcards for filenames are available:</p>
4351 <ul class="simple">
4352 <li>%f -- complete filename without path</li>
4353 <li>%e -- filename without path and without extension</li>
4354 </ul>
4355 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">compiler=gcc</span> <span class="pre">-Wall</span> <span class="pre">-c</span> <span class="pre">&quot;%f&quot;</span></tt></p>
4356 </dd>
4357 <dt>linker</dt>
4358 <dd><p class="first">This item specifies the command to link the file. If the file is not
4359 already compiled, it will be compiled while linking. The -o option
4360 is automatically added by Geany. This item works well with GNU gcc,
4361 but may be problematic with other compilers (esp. with the linker).</p>
4362 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">linker=gcc</span> <span class="pre">-Wall</span> <span class="pre">&quot;%f&quot;</span></tt></p>
4363 </dd>
4364 <dt>run_cmd</dt>
4365 <dd><p class="first">Use this item to execute your file. It has to have been built
4366 already. Use the %e wildcard to have only the name of the executable
4367 (i.e. without extension) or use the %f wildcard if you need the
4368 complete filename, e.g. for shell scripts.</p>
4369 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">run_cmd=&quot;./%e&quot;</span></tt></p>
4370 </dd>
4371 </dl>
4372 </div>
4373 </div>
4374 <div class="section">
4375 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id181" id="special-file-filetypes-common" name="special-file-filetypes-common">Special file filetypes.common</a></h3>
4376 <p>There is a special filetype definition file called
4377 filetypes.common. This file defines some general non-filetype-specific
4378 settings.</p>
4379 <p>See the <a class="reference" href="#format">Format</a> section for how to define styles.</p>
4380 <div class="section">
4381 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id182" id="named-styles-section" name="named-styles-section">[named_styles] Section</a></h4>
4382 <p>Named styles declared here can be used in the [styling] section of any
4383 filetypes.* file.</p>
4384 <p>For example:</p>
4385 <p><em>In filetypes.common</em>:</p>
4386 <pre class="literal-block">
4387 [named_styles]
4388 foo=0xc00000;0xffffff;false;true
4389 bar=foo
4390 </pre>
4391 <p><em>In filetypes.c</em>:</p>
4392 <pre class="literal-block">
4393 [styling]
4394 comment=foo
4395 </pre>
4396 <p>This saves copying and pasting the whole style definition into several
4397 different files.</p>
4398 <div class="note">
4399 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
4400 <p class="last">You can define aliases for named styles, as shown with the <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">bar</span></tt>
4401 entry in the above example, but they must be declared after the
4402 original style.</p>
4403 </div>
4404 </div>
4405 <div class="section">
4406 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id183" id="id5" name="id5">[styling] Section</a></h4>
4407 <dl class="docutils">
4408 <dt>default</dt>
4409 <dd><p class="first">This is the default style. It is used for styling files without a
4410 filetype set.</p>
4411 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">default=0x000000;0xffffff;false;false</span></tt></p>
4412 </dd>
4413 <dt>selection</dt>
4414 <dd><p class="first">The style for coloring selected text. The format is:</p>
4415 <ul class="simple">
4416 <li>Foreground color</li>
4417 <li>Background color</li>
4418 <li>Use foreground color</li>
4419 <li>Use background color</li>
4420 </ul>
4421 <p>The colors are only set if the 3rd or 4th argument is true. When
4422 the colors are not overridden, the default is a dark grey
4423 background with syntax highlighted foreground text.</p>
4424 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">selection=0xc0c0c0;0x00007F;true;true</span></tt></p>
4425 </dd>
4426 <dt>brace_good</dt>
4427 <dd><p class="first">The style for brace highlighting when a matching brace was found.</p>
4428 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">brace_good=0xff0000;0xFFFFFF;true;false</span></tt></p>
4429 </dd>
4430 <dt>brace_bad</dt>
4431 <dd><p class="first">The style for brace highlighting when no matching brace was found.</p>
4432 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">brace_bad=0x0000ff;0xFFFFFF;true;false</span></tt></p>
4433 </dd>
4434 <dt>caret</dt>
4435 <dd><p class="first">The style for coloring the caret(the blinking cursor). Only first
4436 and third argument is interpreted.
4437 Set the third argument to true to change the caret into a block caret.</p>
4438 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">caret=0x000000;0x0;false;false</span></tt></p>
4439 </dd>
4440 <dt>caret_width</dt>
4441 <dd><p class="first">The width for the caret(the blinking cursor). Only the first
4442 argument is interpreted. The width is specified in pixels with
4443 a maximum of three pixel. Use the width 0 to make the caret
4444 invisible.</p>
4445 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">caret=1;0;false;false</span></tt></p>
4446 </dd>
4447 <dt>current_line</dt>
4448 <dd><p class="first">The style for coloring the background of the current line. Only
4449 the second and third arguments are interpreted. The second argument
4450 is the background color. Use the third argument to enable or
4451 disable background highlighting for the current line (has to be
4452 true/false).</p>
4453 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">current_line=0x0;0xe5e5e5;true;false</span></tt></p>
4454 </dd>
4455 <dt>indent_guide</dt>
4456 <dd><p class="first">The style for coloring the indentation guides. Only the first and
4457 second arguments are interpreted.</p>
4458 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">indent_guide=0xc0c0c0;0xffffff;false;false</span></tt></p>
4459 </dd>
4460 <dt>white_space</dt>
4461 <dd><p class="first">The style for coloring the white space if it is shown. The first
4462 both arguments define the foreground and background colors, the
4463 third argument sets whether to use the defined foreground color
4464 or to use the color defined by each filetype for the white space.
4465 The fourth argument defines whether to use the background color.</p>
4466 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">white_space=0xc0c0c0;0xffffff;true;true</span></tt></p>
4467 </dd>
4468 </dl>
4469 <dl class="docutils" id="folding-settings">
4470 <dt>folding_style</dt>
4471 <dd><p class="first">The style of folding icons. Only first and second arguments are
4472 used.</p>
4473 <p>Valid values for the first argument are:</p>
4474 <ul class="simple">
4475 <li>1 -- for boxes</li>
4476 <li>2 -- for circles</li>
4477 <li>3 -- for arrows</li>
4478 <li>4 -- for +/-</li>
4479 </ul>
4480 <p>Valid values for the second argument are:</p>
4481 <ul class="simple">
4482 <li>0 -- for no lines</li>
4483 <li>1 -- for straight lines</li>
4484 <li>2 -- for curved lines</li>
4485 </ul>
4486 <p><em>Default:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">folding_style=1;1;</span></tt></p>
4487 <p class="last"><em>Arrows:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">folding_style=3;0;</span></tt></p>
4488 </dd>
4489 <dt>folding_horiz_line</dt>
4490 <dd><p class="first">Draw a thin horizontal line at the line where text is folded. Only
4491 first argument is used.</p>
4492 <p>Valid values for the first argument are:</p>
4493 <ul class="simple">
4494 <li>0 -- disable, do not draw a line</li>
4495 <li>1 -- draw the line above folded text</li>
4496 <li>2 -- draw the line below folded text</li>
4497 </ul>
4498 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">folding_horiz_line=0;0;false;false</span></tt></p>
4499 </dd>
4500 <dt>line_wrap_visuals</dt>
4501 <dd><p class="first">First argument: drawing of visual flags to indicate a line is wrapped.
4502 This is a bitmask of the values:</p>
4503 <ul class="simple">
4504 <li>0 -- No visual flags</li>
4505 <li>1 -- Visual flag at end of subline of a wrapped line</li>
4506 <li>2 -- Visual flag at begin of subline of a wrapped line. Subline is
4507 indented by at least 1 to make room for the flag.</li>
4508 </ul>
4509 <p>Second argument: wether the visual flags to indicate a line is wrapped
4510 are drawn near the border or near the text. This is a bitmask of the values:</p>
4511 <ul class="simple">
4512 <li>0 -- Visual flags drawn near border</li>
4513 <li>1 -- Visual flag at end of subline drawn near text</li>
4514 <li>2 -- Visual flag at begin of subline drawn near text</li>
4515 </ul>
4516 <p>Only first and second argument is interpreted.</p>
4517 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">line_wrap_visuals=3;0;false;false</span></tt></p>
4518 </dd>
4519 <dt>line_wrap_indent</dt>
4520 <dd><p class="first">First argument: sets the size of indentation of sublines for wrapped lines
4521 in terms of the width of a space, only used when the second argument is <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">0</span></tt>.</p>
4522 <p>Second argument: wrapped sublines can be indented to the position of their
4523 first subline or one more indent level. Possible values:</p>
4524 <ul class="simple">
4525 <li>0 - Wrapped sublines aligned to left of window plus amount set by the first argument</li>
4526 <li>1 - Wrapped sublines are aligned to first subline indent (use the same indentation)</li>
4527 <li>2 - Wrapped sublines are aligned to first subline indent plus one more level of indentation</li>
4528 </ul>
4529 <p>Only first and second argument is interpreted.</p>
4530 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">line_wrap_indent=0;1;false;false</span></tt></p>
4531 </dd>
4532 <dt>translucency</dt>
4533 <dd><p class="first">Translucency for the current line (first argument) and the selection
4534 (second argument). Values between 0 and 256 are accepted.</p>
4535 <p>Note for Windows 95, 98 and ME users:
4536 keep this value at 256 to disable translucency otherwise Geany might crash.</p>
4537 <p>Only the first and second argument is interpreted.</p>
4538 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">translucency=256;256;false;false</span></tt></p>
4539 </dd>
4540 <dt>marker_line</dt>
4541 <dd><p class="first">The style for a highlighted line (e.g when using Goto line or goto tag).
4542 The foreground color (first argument) is only used when the Markers margin
4543 is enabled (see View menu).</p>
4544 <p>Only the first and second argument is interpreted.</p>
4545 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">marker_line=0x000000;0xffff00;false;false</span></tt></p>
4546 </dd>
4547 <dt>marker_search</dt>
4548 <dd><p class="first">The style for a marked search results (when using &quot;Mark&quot; in Search dialogs).
4549 The second argument sets the background colour for the drawn rectangle.</p>
4550 <p>Only the second argument is interpreted.</p>
4551 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">marker_search=0x000000;0xb8f4b8;false;false</span></tt></p>
4552 </dd>
4553 <dt>marker_mark</dt>
4554 <dd><p class="first">The style for a marked line (e.g when using the &quot;Toggle Marker&quot; keybinding
4555 (Ctrl-M)). The foreground color (first argument) is only used
4556 when the Markers margin is enabled (see View menu).</p>
4557 <p>Only the first and second argument is interpreted.</p>
4558 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">marker_mark=0x000000;0xb8f4b8;false;false</span></tt></p>
4559 </dd>
4560 <dt>marker_translucency</dt>
4561 <dd><p class="first">Translucency for the line marker (first argument) and the search marker
4562 (second argument). Values between 0 and 256 are accepted.</p>
4563 <p>Note for Windows 95, 98 and ME users:
4564 keep this value at 256 to disable translucency otherwise Geany might crash.</p>
4565 <p>Only the first and second argument is interpreted.</p>
4566 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">marker_translucency=256;256;false;false</span></tt></p>
4567 </dd>
4568 <dt>line_height</dt>
4569 <dd><p class="first">Amount of space to be drawn above and below the line's baseline.
4570 The first argument defines the amount of space to be drawn above the line, the second
4571 argument defines the amount of space to be drawn below.</p>
4572 <p>Only the first and second argument is interpreted.</p>
4573 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">line_height=0;0;false;false</span></tt></p>
4574 </dd>
4575 <dt>calltips</dt>
4576 <dd><p class="first">The style for coloring the calltips. The first two arguments
4577 define the foreground and background colors, the third and fourth
4578 arguments set whether to use the defined colors.</p>
4579 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">calltips=0xc0c0c0;0xffffff;false;false</span></tt></p>
4580 </dd>
4581 </dl>
4582 </div>
4583 <div class="section">
4584 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id184" id="id6" name="id6">[settings] Section</a></h4>
4585 <dl class="docutils">
4586 <dt>whitespace_chars</dt>
4587 <dd><p class="first">Characters to treat as whitespace. These characters are ignored
4588 when moving, selecting and deleting across word boundaries
4589 (see <a class="reference" href="#scintilla-keyboard-commands">Scintilla keyboard commands</a>).</p>
4590 <p>This should include space (\s) and tab (\t).</p>
4591 <p class="last"><em>Example:</em> <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">whitespace_chars=\s\t!\&quot;#$%&amp;'()*+,-./:;&lt;=&gt;?&#64;[\\]^`{|}~</span></tt></p>
4592 </dd>
4593 </dl>
4594 </div>
4595 </div>
4596 </div>
4597 <div class="section">
4598 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id185" id="filetype-extensions" name="filetype-extensions">Filetype extensions</a></h2>
4599 <p>To change the default filetype extension used when saving a new file,
4600 see <a class="reference" href="#filetype-definition-files">Filetype definition files</a>.</p>
4601 <p>You can override the list of file extensions that Geany uses for each
4602 filetype using the <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">filetype_extensions.conf</span></tt> file.</p>
4603 <p>To override the system-wide configuration file, copy it from
4604 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix/share/geany</span></tt> to your configuration directory, usually
4605 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/.config/geany/</span></tt>. <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix</span></tt> is the path where Geany is installed
4606 (see <a class="reference" href="#installation-prefix">Installation prefix</a>).</p>
4607 <p>For example:</p>
4608 <pre class="literal-block">
4609 % cp /usr/local/share/geany/filetype_extensions.conf /home/username/.config/geany/
4610 </pre>
4611 <p>Then edit it and remove all the lines for filetype extensions that
4612 you do not want to override. The remaining lines can be edited after
4613 the <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">=</span></tt> sign, using a semi-colon separated list of patterns which
4614 should be matched for that filetype.</p>
4615 <p>For example, to set the filetype extensions for Make, the
4616 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">/home/username/.config/geany/filetype_extensions.conf</span></tt> file should
4617 look like:</p>
4618 <pre class="literal-block">
4619 [Extensions]
4620 Make=Makefile*;*.mk;Buildfile;
4621 </pre>
4622 </div>
4623 <div class="section">
4624 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id186" id="preferences-file-format" name="preferences-file-format">Preferences File Format</a></h2>
4625 <p>The preferences file <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/.config/geany/geany.conf</span></tt> holds settings for all the items configured
4626 in the preferences dialog. This file should not be edited while Geany is running
4627 as the file will be overwritten when the preferences in Geany are changed or Geany
4628 is quitted.</p>
4629 <div class="section">
4630 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id187" id="hidden-preferences" name="hidden-preferences">Hidden preferences</a></h3>
4631 <p>There are some rarely used preferences that are not shown in the Preferences
4632 dialog. These can be set by editing the preferences file, then
4633 restarting Geany. Search for the key name, then edit the value. Example:</p>
4634 <blockquote>
4635 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">brace_match_ltgt=true</span></tt></blockquote>
4636 <p>The table below show the key names of hidden preferences in the
4637 configuration file.</p>
4638 <table border="1" class="docutils">
4639 <colgroup>
4640 <col width="34%" />
4641 <col width="46%" />
4642 <col width="19%" />
4643 </colgroup>
4644 <thead valign="bottom">
4645 <tr><th class="head">Key</th>
4646 <th class="head">Description</th>
4647 <th class="head">Default</th>
4648 </tr>
4649 </thead>
4650 <tbody valign="top">
4651 <tr><td><strong>Editor related</strong></td>
4652 <td>&nbsp;</td>
4653 <td>&nbsp;</td>
4654 </tr>
4655 <tr><td>brace_match_ltgt</td>
4656 <td>Whether to highlight &lt;, &gt; angle brackets.</td>
4657 <td>false</td>
4658 </tr>
4659 <tr><td>show_editor_scrollbars</td>
4660 <td>Whether to display scrollbars. If set to
4661 false, the horizontal and vertical
4662 scrollbars are hidden completely.</td>
4663 <td>true</td>
4664 </tr>
4665 <tr><td>use_gtk_word_boundaries</td>
4666 <td>Whether to look for the end of a word when
4667 using word-boundary related Scintilla
4668 commands (see <a class="reference" href="#scintilla-keyboard-commands">Scintilla keyboard
4669 commands</a>).</td>
4670 <td>true</td>
4671 </tr>
4672 <tr><td>complete_snippets_whilst_editing</td>
4673 <td>Whether to allow completion of snippets
4674 when editing an existing line (i.e. there
4675 is some text after the current cursor
4676 position on the line). Only used when the
4677 keybinding <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">Complete</span> <span class="pre">snippet</span></tt> is set to
4678 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">Space</span></tt>.</td>
4679 <td>false</td>
4680 </tr>
4681 <tr><td><strong>Interface related</strong></td>
4682 <td>&nbsp;</td>
4683 <td>&nbsp;</td>
4684 </tr>
4685 <tr><td>show_symbol_list_expanders</td>
4686 <td>Whether to show or hide the small expander
4687 icons on the symbol list treeview (only
4688 available with GTK 2.12 or above).</td>
4689 <td>true</td>
4690 </tr>
4691 <tr><td>allow_always_save</td>
4692 <td>Whether files can be saved always, even if
4693 they don't have any changes. By default,
4694 the Save buttons and menu items are
4695 disabled when a file is unchanged. When
4696 setting this option to true, the Save
4697 buttons and menu items are always active
4698 and files can be saved.</td>
4699 <td>false</td>
4700 </tr>
4701 <tr><td>compiler_tab_autoscroll</td>
4702 <td>Whether to automatically scroll to the
4703 last line of the output in the Compiler
4704 tab.</td>
4705 <td>true</td>
4706 </tr>
4707 <tr><td><strong>VTE related</strong></td>
4708 <td>&nbsp;</td>
4709 <td>&nbsp;</td>
4710 </tr>
4711 <tr><td>emulation</td>
4712 <td>Terminal emulation mode. Only change this
4713 if you have VTE termcap files other than
4714 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">vte/termcap/xterm</span></tt>.</td>
4715 <td>xterm</td>
4716 </tr>
4717 <tr><td>send_selection_unsafe</td>
4718 <td>By default, Geany strips any trailing
4719 newline characters from the current
4720 selection before sending it to the terminal
4721 to not execute arbitrary code. This is
4722 mainly a security feature.
4723 If, for whatever reasons, you really want
4724 it to be executed directly, set this option
4725 to true.</td>
4726 <td>false</td>
4727 </tr>
4728 <tr><td><strong>File related</strong></td>
4729 <td>&nbsp;</td>
4730 <td>&nbsp;</td>
4731 </tr>
4732 <tr><td>use_safe_file_saving</td>
4733 <td>Defines the mode how Geany saves files to
4734 disk. If disabled, Geany directly writes
4735 the content of the document to disk. This
4736 might cause in loss of data when there is
4737 no more free space on disk to save the
4738 file. When set to true, Geany first saves
4739 the contents into a temporary file and if
4740 this succeeded, the temporary file is
4741 moved to the real file to save.
4742 This gives better error checking in case of
4743 no more free disk space. But it also
4744 destroys hard links of the original file
4745 and its permissions (e.g. executable flags
4746 are reset). Use this with care as it can
4747 break things seriously.
4748 The better approach would be to ensure your
4749 disk won't run out of free space.</td>
4750 <td>false</td>
4751 </tr>
4752 <tr><td><strong>Build Menu related</strong></td>
4753 <td>&nbsp;</td>
4754 <td>&nbsp;</td>
4755 </tr>
4756 <tr><td>number_ft_menu_items</td>
4757 <td>The maximum number of menu items in the
4758 filetype section of the Build menu.</td>
4759 <td>2</td>
4760 </tr>
4761 <tr><td>number_non_ft_menu_items</td>
4762 <td>The maximum number of menu items in the
4763 non-filetype section of the Build menu.</td>
4764 <td>3</td>
4765 </tr>
4766 <tr><td>number_exec_menu_items</td>
4767 <td>The maximum number of menu items in the
4768 execute section of the Build menu.</td>
4769 <td>2</td>
4770 </tr>
4771 </tbody>
4772 </table>
4773 </div>
4774 <div class="section">
4775 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id188" id="build-menu-section" name="build-menu-section">[build-menu] Section</a></h3>
4776 <p>The [build-menu] section contains the configuration of the build menu.
4777 This section can occur in filetype, preferences and project files and
4778 always has the format described here.  Different menu items are loaded
4779 from different files, see the table in the <a class="reference" href="#build-menu-configuration">Build Menu Configuration</a>
4780 section for details.  All the settings can be configured from the dialogs
4781 except the execute command in filetype files and filetype definitions in
4782 the project file, so these are the only ones which need hand editing.</p>
4783 <p>The build-menu section stores one entry for each setting for each menu item that
4784 is configured.  The keys for these settings have the format:</p>
4785 <blockquote>
4786 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">GG_NN_FF</span></tt></blockquote>
4787 <p>where:</p>
4788 <ul class="simple">
4789 <li>GG - is the menu item group,<ul>
4790 <li>FT for filetype</li>
4791 <li>NF for non-filetype</li>
4792 <li>EX for execute</li>
4793 </ul>
4794 </li>
4795 <li>NN - is a two decimal digit number of the item within the group,
4796 starting at 00</li>
4797 <li>FF - is the field,<ul>
4798 <li>LB for label</li>
4799 <li>CM for command</li>
4800 <li>WD for working directory</li>
4801 </ul>
4802 </li>
4803 </ul>
4804 </div>
4805 </div>
4806 <div class="section">
4807 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id189" id="project-file-format" name="project-file-format">Project File Format</a></h2>
4808 <p>The project file contains project related settings and possibly a
4809 record of the current session files.</p>
4810 <div class="section">
4811 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id190" id="build-menu-additions" name="build-menu-additions">[build-menu] Additions</a></h3>
4812 <p>The project file also can have extra fields in the [build-menu] section
4813 in addition to those listed in <a class="reference" href="#build-menu-section">[build-menu] Section</a> above.</p>
4814 <p>When filetype menu items are configured for the project they are stored
4815 in the project file.</p>
4816 <p>The <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">filetypes</span></tt> entry is a list of the filetypes which exist in the
4817 project file.</p>
4818 <p>For each filetype the entries for that filetype have the format defined in
4819 <a class="reference" href="#build-menu-section">[build-menu] Section</a> but the key is prefixed by the name of the filetype
4820 as it appears in the <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">filetypes</span></tt> entry, eg the entry for the label of
4821 filetype menu item 0 for the C filetype would be</p>
4822 <blockquote>
4823 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">CFT_00_LB=Label</span></tt></blockquote>
4824 </div>
4825 </div>
4826 <div class="section">
4827 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id191" id="templates" name="templates">Templates</a></h2>
4828 <p>Geany supports the following templates:</p>
4829 <ul class="simple">
4830 <li>ChangeLog entry</li>
4831 <li>File header</li>
4832 <li>Function description</li>
4833 <li>Short GPL notice</li>
4834 <li>Short BSD notice</li>
4835 <li>File templates</li>
4836 </ul>
4837 <p>To use these templates, just open the Edit menu or open the popup menu
4838 by right-clicking in the editor widget, and choose &quot;Insert Comments&quot;
4839 and insert templates as you want.</p>
4840 <p>Some templates (like File header or ChangeLog entry) will always be
4841 inserted at the top of the file.</p>
4842 <p>To insert a function description, the cursor must be inside
4843 of the function, so that the function name can be determined
4844 automatically. The description will be positioned correctly one line
4845 above the function, just check it out. If the cursor is not inside
4846 of a function or the function name cannot be determined, the inserted
4847 function description won't contain the correct function name but &quot;unknown&quot;
4848 instead.</p>
4849 <div class="note">
4850 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
4851 <p class="last">Geany automatically reloads template information when it notices you
4852 save a file in the user's template configuration directory. You can
4853 also force this by selecting <em>Tools-&gt;Reload Configuration</em>.</p>
4854 </div>
4855 <div class="section">
4856 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id192" id="template-meta-data" name="template-meta-data">Template meta data</a></h3>
4857 <p>Meta data can be used with all templates, but by default user set
4858 meta data is only used for the ChangeLog and File header templates.</p>
4859 <p>In the configuration dialog you can find a tab &quot;Templates&quot; (see
4860 <a class="reference" href="#template-preferences">Template preferences</a>). You can define the default values
4861 which will be inserted in the templates. You should select
4862 <em>Tools-&gt;Reload Configuration</em> or restart Geany after making changes.</p>
4863 </div>
4864 <div class="section">
4865 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id193" id="file-templates" name="file-templates">File templates</a></h3>
4866 <p>File templates are templates used as the basis of a new file. To
4867 use them, choose the <em>New (with Template)</em> menu item from the <em>File</em>
4868 menu.</p>
4869 <p>By default, file templates are installed for some filetypes. Custom
4870 file templates can be added by creating the appropriate template file. You can
4871 also edit the default file templates.</p>
4872 <p>The file's contents are just the text to place in the document, with
4873 optional template wildcards like <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">{fileheader}</span></tt>. The fileheader
4874 wildcard can be placed anywhere, but it's usually put on the first
4875 line of the file, followed by a blank line.</p>
4876 <div class="section">
4877 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id194" id="custom-file-templates" name="custom-file-templates">Custom file templates</a></h4>
4878 <p>These are read from the following directories:</p>
4879 <ul class="simple">
4880 <li><tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix/share/geany/templates/files</span></tt> (see <a class="reference" href="#installation-prefix">Installation prefix</a>)</li>
4881 <li><tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/.config/geany/templates/files</span></tt> (created the first time
4882 Geany is started).</li>
4883 </ul>
4884 <p>The filetype to use is detected from the template file's extension, if
4885 any. For example, creating a file <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">module.c</span></tt> would add a menu item
4886 which created a new document with the filetype set to 'C'.</p>
4887 <p>The template file is read from disk when the corresponding menu item is
4888 clicked.</p>
4889 </div>
4890 <div class="section">
4891 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id195" id="filetype-templates" name="filetype-templates">Filetype templates</a></h4>
4892 <div class="note">
4893 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
4894 <p class="last">It's recommended to use custom file templates instead.</p>
4895 </div>
4896 <p>Filetype template files are read from the <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/.config/geany/templates</span></tt>
4897 directory, and are named &quot;filetype.&quot; followed by the filetype
4898 name, e.g. &quot;filetype.python&quot;, &quot;filetype.sh&quot;, etc. If you are
4899 unsure about the filetype name extensions, they are the same as
4900 the filetype configuration file extensions, commonly installed in
4901 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">/usr/share/geany</span></tt>, with the prefix &quot;filetypes.&quot;.</p>
4902 <p>There is also a template file <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">filetype.none</span></tt> which is used when
4903 the New command is used without a filetype. This is empty by default.</p>
4904 </div>
4905 </div>
4906 <div class="section">
4907 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id196" id="customizing-templates" name="customizing-templates">Customizing templates</a></h3>
4908 <p>Each template can be customized to your needs. The templates are
4909 stored in the <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/.config/geany/templates/</span></tt> directory (see the section called
4910 <a class="reference" href="#command-line-options">Command line options</a> for further information about the configuration
4911 directory). Just open the desired template with an editor (ideally,
4912 Geany ;-) ) and edit the template to your needs. There are some
4913 wildcards which will be automatically replaced by Geany at startup.</p>
4914 <div class="section">
4915 <h4><a class="toc-backref" href="#id197" id="template-wildcards" name="template-wildcards">Template wildcards</a></h4>
4916 <p>All wildcards must be enclosed by &quot;{&quot; and &quot;}&quot;, e.g. {date}.</p>
4917 <p><strong>Wildcards for character escaping</strong></p>
4918 <table border="1" class="docutils">
4919 <colgroup>
4920 <col width="14%" />
4921 <col width="46%" />
4922 <col width="40%" />
4923 </colgroup>
4924 <thead valign="bottom">
4925 <tr><th class="head">Wildcard</th>
4926 <th class="head">Description</th>
4927 <th class="head">Available in</th>
4928 </tr>
4929 </thead>
4930 <tbody valign="top">
4931 <tr><td>ob</td>
4932 <td>{ Opening Brace (used to prevent other
4933 wildcards being expanded).</td>
4934 <td>file templates, file header, snippets.</td>
4935 </tr>
4936 <tr><td>cb</td>
4937 <td>} Closing Brace.</td>
4938 <td>file templates, file header, snippets.</td>
4939 </tr>
4940 <tr><td>pc</td>
4941 <td>% Percent (used to escape e.g. %block% in
4942 snippets).</td>
4943 <td>snippets.</td>
4944 </tr>
4945 </tbody>
4946 </table>
4947 <p><strong>Global wildcards</strong></p>
4948 <p>These are configurable, see <a class="reference" href="#template-preferences">Template preferences</a>.</p>
4949 <table border="1" class="docutils">
4950 <colgroup>
4951 <col width="14%" />
4952 <col width="46%" />
4953 <col width="40%" />
4954 </colgroup>
4955 <thead valign="bottom">
4956 <tr><th class="head">Wildcard</th>
4957 <th class="head">Description</th>
4958 <th class="head">Available in</th>
4959 </tr>
4960 </thead>
4961 <tbody valign="top">
4962 <tr><td>developer</td>
4963 <td>The name of the developer.</td>
4964 <td>file templates, file header,
4965 function description, ChangeLog entry,
4966 bsd, gpl, snippets.</td>
4967 </tr>
4968 <tr><td>initial</td>
4969 <td>The developer's initials, e.g. &quot;ET&quot; for
4970 Enrico Tröger or &quot;JFD&quot; for John Foobar Doe.</td>
4971 <td>file templates, file header,
4972 function description, ChangeLog entry,
4973 bsd, gpl, snippets.</td>
4974 </tr>
4975 <tr><td>mail</td>
4976 <td>The email address of the developer.</td>
4977 <td>file templates, file header,
4978 function description, ChangeLog entry,
4979 bsd, gpl, snippets.</td>
4980 </tr>
4981 <tr><td>company</td>
4982 <td>The company the developer is working for.</td>
4983 <td>file templates, file header,
4984 function description, ChangeLog entry,
4985 bsd, gpl, snippets.</td>
4986 </tr>
4987 <tr><td>version</td>
4988 <td>The initial version of a new file.</td>
4989 <td>file templates, file header,
4990 function description, ChangeLog entry,
4991 bsd, gpl, snippets.</td>
4992 </tr>
4993 </tbody>
4994 </table>
4995 <p><strong>Date &amp; time wildcards</strong></p>
4996 <p>The format for these wildcards can be changed in the preferences
4997 dialog, see <a class="reference" href="#template-preferences">Template preferences</a>. You can use any conversion
4998 specifiers which can be used with the ANSI C strftime function.
4999 For details please see <a class="reference" href="http://man.cx/strftime">http://man.cx/strftime</a>.</p>
5000 <table border="1" class="docutils">
5001 <colgroup>
5002 <col width="14%" />
5003 <col width="46%" />
5004 <col width="40%" />
5005 </colgroup>
5006 <thead valign="bottom">
5007 <tr><th class="head">Wildcard</th>
5008 <th class="head">Description</th>
5009 <th class="head">Available in</th>
5010 </tr>
5011 </thead>
5012 <tbody valign="top">
5013 <tr><td>year</td>
5014 <td>The current year. Default format is: YYYY.</td>
5015 <td>file templates, file header,
5016 function description, ChangeLog entry,
5017 bsd, gpl, snippets.</td>
5018 </tr>
5019 <tr><td>date</td>
5020 <td>The current date. Default format:
5021 YYYY-MM-DD.</td>
5022 <td>file templates, file header,
5023 function description, ChangeLog entry,
5024 bsd, gpl, snippets.</td>
5025 </tr>
5026 <tr><td>datetime</td>
5027 <td>The current date and time. Default format:
5028 DD.MM.YYYY HH:mm:ss ZZZZ.</td>
5029 <td>file templates, file header,
5030 function description, ChangeLog entry,
5031 bsd, gpl, snippets.</td>
5032 </tr>
5033 </tbody>
5034 </table>
5035 <p><strong>Dynamic wildcards</strong></p>
5036 <table border="1" class="docutils">
5037 <colgroup>
5038 <col width="14%" />
5039 <col width="46%" />
5040 <col width="40%" />
5041 </colgroup>
5042 <thead valign="bottom">
5043 <tr><th class="head">Wildcard</th>
5044 <th class="head">Description</th>
5045 <th class="head">Available in</th>
5046 </tr>
5047 </thead>
5048 <tbody valign="top">
5049 <tr><td>untitled</td>
5050 <td>The string &quot;untitled&quot; (this will be
5051 translated to your locale), used in
5052 file templates.</td>
5053 <td>file templates, file header,
5054 function description, ChangeLog entry,
5055 bsd, gpl, snippets.</td>
5056 </tr>
5057 <tr><td>geanyversion</td>
5058 <td>The actual Geany version, e.g.
5059 &quot;Geany 0.19.1&quot;.</td>
5060 <td>file templates, file header,
5061 function description, ChangeLog entry,
5062 bsd, gpl, snippets.</td>
5063 </tr>
5064 <tr><td>filename</td>
5065 <td>The filename of the current file.
5066 For new files, it's only replaced when
5067 first saving if found on the first 3 lines
5068 of the file.</td>
5069 <td>file header, snippets, file
5070 templates.</td>
5071 </tr>
5072 <tr><td>project</td>
5073 <td>The current project's name, if any.</td>
5074 <td>file header, snippets, file templates.</td>
5075 </tr>
5076 <tr><td>description</td>
5077 <td>The current project's description, if any.</td>
5078 <td>file header, snippets, file templates.</td>
5079 </tr>
5080 <tr><td>functionname</td>
5081 <td>The function name of the function at the
5082 cursor position. This wildcard will only be
5083 replaced in the function description
5084 template.</td>
5085 <td>function description.</td>
5086 </tr>
5087 <tr><td>command:path</td>
5088 <td>Executes the specified command and replace
5089 the wildcard with the command's standard
5090 output. See <a class="reference" href="#special-command-wildcard">Special {command:} wildcard</a>
5091 for details.</td>
5092 <td>file templates, file header,
5093 function description, ChangeLog entry,
5094 bsd, gpl, snippets.</td>
5095 </tr>
5096 </tbody>
5097 </table>
5098 <p><strong>Template insertion wildcards</strong></p>
5099 <table border="1" class="docutils">
5100 <colgroup>
5101 <col width="14%" />
5102 <col width="46%" />
5103 <col width="40%" />
5104 </colgroup>
5105 <thead valign="bottom">
5106 <tr><th class="head">Wildcard</th>
5107 <th class="head">Description</th>
5108 <th class="head">Available in</th>
5109 </tr>
5110 </thead>
5111 <tbody valign="top">
5112 <tr><td>gpl</td>
5113 <td>This wildcard inserts a short GPL notice.</td>
5114 <td>file header.</td>
5115 </tr>
5116 <tr><td>bsd</td>
5117 <td>This wildcard inserts a BSD licence notice.</td>
5118 <td>file header.</td>
5119 </tr>
5120 <tr><td>fileheader</td>
5121 <td>The file header template. This wildcard
5122 will only be replaced in filetype
5123 templates.</td>
5124 <td>snippets, file templates.</td>
5125 </tr>
5126 </tbody>
5127 </table>
5128 <div class="section">
5129 <h5><a class="toc-backref" href="#id198" id="special-command-wildcard" name="special-command-wildcard">Special {command:} wildcard</a></h5>
5130 <p>The {command:} wildcard is a special one because it can execute
5131 a specified command and put the command's output (stdout) into
5132 the template.</p>
5133 <p>Example:</p>
5134 <pre class="literal-block">
5135 {command:uname -a}
5136 </pre>
5137 <p>will result in:</p>
5138 <pre class="literal-block">
5139 Linux localhost 2.6.9-023stab046.2-smp #1 SMP Mon Dec 10 15:04:55 MSK 2007 x86_64 GNU/Linux
5140 </pre>
5141 <p>Using this wildcard you can insert nearly any arbitrary text into the
5142 template.</p>
5143 <p>In the environment of the executed command the variables
5144 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">GEANY_FILENAME</span></tt>, <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">GEANY_FILETYPE</span></tt> and <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">GEANY_FUNCNAME</span></tt> are set.
5145 The value of these variables is filled in only if Geany knows about it.
5146 For example, <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">GEANY_FUNCNAME</span></tt> is only filled within the function
5147 description template. However, these variables are <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">always</span></tt> set,
5148 just maybe with an empty value.
5149 You can easily access them e.g. within an executed shell script using:</p>
5150 <pre class="literal-block">
5151 $GEANY_FILENAME
5152 </pre>
5153 <div class="note">
5154 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
5155 <p class="last">If the specified command could not be found or not executed, the wildcard is substituted
5156 by an empty string. In such cases, you can find the occurred error message on Geany's
5157 standard error and in the Help-&gt;Debug Messages dialog.</p>
5158 </div>
5159 </div>
5160 </div>
5161 </div>
5162 </div>
5163 <div class="section">
5164 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id199" id="customizing-the-toolbar" name="customizing-the-toolbar">Customizing the toolbar</a></h2>
5165 <p>You can add, remove and reorder the elements in the toolbar by using the toolbar editor
5166 by manually editing the file <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">ui_toolbar.xml</span></tt>.</p>
5167 <p>The toolbar editor can be opened from the preferences editor on the Toolbar tab or
5168 by right-clicking on the toolbar itself and choosing it from the menu.</p>
5169 <div class="section">
5170 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id200" id="manually-editing-of-the-toolbar-layout" name="manually-editing-of-the-toolbar-layout">Manually editing of the toolbar layout</a></h3>
5171 <p>To override the system-wide configuration file, copy it from
5172 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix/share/geany</span></tt> to your configuration directory, usually
5173 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">~/.config/geany/</span></tt>. <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">$prefix</span></tt> is the path where Geany is installed
5174 (see <a class="reference" href="#installation-prefix">Installation prefix</a>).</p>
5175 <p>For example:</p>
5176 <pre class="literal-block">
5177 % cp /usr/local/share/geany/ui_toolbar.xml /home/username/.config/geany/
5178 </pre>
5179 <p>Then edit it and add any of the available elements listed in the file or remove
5180 any of the existing elements. Of course, you can also reorder the elements as
5181 you wish and add or remove additional separators.
5182 This file must be valid XML, otherwise the global toolbar UI definition
5183 will be used instead.</p>
5184 <p>Your changes are applied once you save the file.</p>
5185 <div class="note">
5186 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
5187 <ol class="last arabic simple">
5188 <li>You cannot add new actions which are not listed below.</li>
5189 <li>Everything you add or change must be inside the /ui/toolbar/ path.</li>
5190 </ol>
5191 </div>
5192 </div>
5193 <div class="section">
5194 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id201" id="available-toolbar-elements" name="available-toolbar-elements">Available toolbar elements</a></h3>
5195 <table border="1" class="docutils">
5196 <colgroup>
5197 <col width="19%" />
5198 <col width="81%" />
5199 </colgroup>
5200 <thead valign="bottom">
5201 <tr><th class="head">Element name</th>
5202 <th class="head">Description</th>
5203 </tr>
5204 </thead>
5205 <tbody valign="top">
5206 <tr><td>New</td>
5207 <td>Create a new file</td>
5208 </tr>
5209 <tr><td>Open</td>
5210 <td>Open an existing file</td>
5211 </tr>
5212 <tr><td>Save</td>
5213 <td>Save the current file</td>
5214 </tr>
5215 <tr><td>SaveAll</td>
5216 <td>Save all open files</td>
5217 </tr>
5218 <tr><td>Reload</td>
5219 <td>Reload the current file from disk</td>
5220 </tr>
5221 <tr><td>Close</td>
5222 <td>Close the current file</td>
5223 </tr>
5224 <tr><td>CloseAll</td>
5225 <td>Close all open files</td>
5226 </tr>
5227 <tr><td>Print</td>
5228 <td>Print the current file</td>
5229 </tr>
5230 <tr><td>Cut</td>
5231 <td>Cut the current selection</td>
5232 </tr>
5233 <tr><td>Copy</td>
5234 <td>Copy the current selection</td>
5235 </tr>
5236 <tr><td>Paste</td>
5237 <td>Paste the contents of the clipboard</td>
5238 </tr>
5239 <tr><td>Delete</td>
5240 <td>Delete the current selection</td>
5241 </tr>
5242 <tr><td>Undo</td>
5243 <td>Undo the last modification</td>
5244 </tr>
5245 <tr><td>Redo</td>
5246 <td>Redo the last modification</td>
5247 </tr>
5248 <tr><td>NavBack</td>
5249 <td>Navigate back a location</td>
5250 </tr>
5251 <tr><td>NavFor</td>
5252 <td>Navigate forward a location</td>
5253 </tr>
5254 <tr><td>Compile</td>
5255 <td>Compile the current file</td>
5256 </tr>
5257 <tr><td>Build</td>
5258 <td>Build the current file, includes a submenu for Make commands. Geany
5259 remembers the last chosen action from the submenu and uses this as default
5260 action when the button itself is clicked.</td>
5261 </tr>
5262 <tr><td>Run</td>
5263 <td>Run or view the current file</td>
5264 </tr>
5265 <tr><td>Color</td>
5266 <td>Open a color chooser dialog, to interactively pick colors from a palette</td>
5267 </tr>
5268 <tr><td>ZoomIn</td>
5269 <td>Zoom in the text</td>
5270 </tr>
5271 <tr><td>ZoomOut</td>
5272 <td>Zoom out the text</td>
5273 </tr>
5274 <tr><td>UnIndent</td>
5275 <td>Decrease indentation</td>
5276 </tr>
5277 <tr><td>Indent</td>
5278 <td>Increase indentation</td>
5279 </tr>
5280 <tr><td>Replace</td>
5281 <td>Replace text in the current document</td>
5282 </tr>
5283 <tr><td>SearchEntry</td>
5284 <td>The search field belonging to the 'Search' element (can be used alone)</td>
5285 </tr>
5286 <tr><td>Search</td>
5287 <td>Find the entered text in the current file (only useful if you also
5288 use 'SearchEntry')</td>
5289 </tr>
5290 <tr><td>GotoEntry</td>
5291 <td>The goto field belonging to the 'Goto' element (can be used alone)</td>
5292 </tr>
5293 <tr><td>Goto</td>
5294 <td>Jump to the entered line number (only useful if you also use 'GotoEntry')</td>
5295 </tr>
5296 <tr><td>Preferences</td>
5297 <td>Show the preferences dialog</td>
5298 </tr>
5299 <tr><td>Quit</td>
5300 <td>Quit Geany</td>
5301 </tr>
5302 </tbody>
5303 </table>
5304 </div>
5305 </div>
5306 </div>
5307 <div class="section">
5308 <h1><a class="toc-backref" href="#id202" id="plugin-documentation" name="plugin-documentation">Plugin documentation</a></h1>
5309 <div class="section">
5310 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id203" id="save-actions" name="save-actions">Save Actions</a></h2>
5311 <div class="section">
5312 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id204" id="instant-save" name="instant-save">Instant Save</a></h3>
5313 <p>This plugin sets on every new file (File-&gt;New or File-&gt; New (with template))
5314 a randomly chosen filename and set its filetype appropriate to the used template
5315 or when no template was used, to a configurable default filetype.
5316 This enables you to quickly compile, build and/or run the new file without the
5317 need to give it an explicit filename using the Save As dialog. This might be
5318 useful when you often create new files just for testing some code or something
5319 similar.</p>
5320 </div>
5321 <div class="section">
5322 <h3><a class="toc-backref" href="#id205" id="backup-copy" name="backup-copy">Backup Copy</a></h3>
5323 <p>This plugin creates a backup copy of the current file in Geany when it is
5324 saved. You can specify the directory where the backup copy is saved and
5325 you can configure the automatically added extension in the configure dialog
5326 in Geany's plugin manager.</p>
5327 <p>After the plugin was loaded in Geany's plugin manager, every file is
5328 copied into the configured backup directory when the file is saved in Geany.</p>
5329 </div>
5330 </div>
5331 </div>
5332 <div class="section">
5333 <h1><a class="toc-backref" href="#id206" id="contributing-to-this-document" name="contributing-to-this-document">Contributing to this document</a></h1>
5334 <p>This document (<tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">geany.txt</span></tt>) is written in <a class="reference" href="http://docutils.sourceforge.net/rst.html">reStructuredText</a>
5335 (or &quot;reST&quot;). The source file for it is located in Geany's <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">doc</span></tt>
5336 subdirectory.  If you intend on making changes, you should grab the
5337 source right from SVN to make sure you've got the newest version. After
5338 editing the file, to build the HTML document to see how your changes
5339 look, run &quot;<tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">make</span> <span class="pre">doc</span></tt>&quot; in the subdirectory <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">doc</span></tt> of Geany's source
5340 directory. This regenerates the <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">geany.html</span></tt> file. To generate a PDF
5341 file, use the command &quot;<tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">make</span> <span class="pre">pdf</span></tt>&quot; which should generate a file called
5342 geany-0.19.1.pdf.</p>
5343 <p>After you are happy with your changes, create a patch:</p>
5344 <pre class="literal-block">
5345 % svn diff geany.txt &gt; foo.patch
5346 </pre>
5347 <p>and then submit that file to the mailing list for review.</p>
5348 <p>Note, you will need the Python docutils software package installed
5349 to build the docs. The package is named <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">python-docutils</span></tt> on Debian
5350 and Fedora systems.</p>
5351 </div>
5352 <div class="section">
5353 <h1><a class="toc-backref" href="#id207" id="scintilla-keyboard-commands" name="scintilla-keyboard-commands">Scintilla keyboard commands</a></h1>
5354 <p>Copyright © 1998, 2006 Neil Hodgson &lt;neilh(at)scintilla(dot)org&gt;</p>
5355 <p>This appendix is distributed under the terms of the License for
5356 Scintilla and SciTE. A copy of this license can be found in the file
5357 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">scintilla/License.txt</span></tt> included with the source code of this
5358 program and in the appendix of this document. See <a class="reference" href="#license-for-scintilla-and-scite">License for
5359 Scintilla and SciTE</a>.</p>
5360 <p>20 June 2006</p>
5361 <div class="section">
5362 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id208" id="keyboard-commands" name="keyboard-commands">Keyboard commands</a></h2>
5363 <p>Keyboard commands for Scintilla mostly follow common Windows and GTK+
5364 conventions. All move keys (arrows, page up/down, home and end)
5365 allows to extend or reduce the stream selection when holding the
5366 Shift key, and the rectangular selection when holding the Shift and
5367 Ctrl keys. Some keys may not be available with some national keyboards
5368 or because they are taken by the system such as by a window manager
5369 or GTK. Keyboard equivalents of menu commands are listed in the
5370 menus. Some less common commands with no menu equivalent are:</p>
5371 <table border="1" class="docutils">
5372 <colgroup>
5373 <col width="67%" />
5374 <col width="33%" />
5375 </colgroup>
5376 <thead valign="bottom">
5377 <tr><th class="head">Action</th>
5378 <th class="head">Shortcut key</th>
5379 </tr>
5380 </thead>
5381 <tbody valign="top">
5382 <tr><td>Magnify text size.</td>
5383 <td>Ctrl+Keypad+</td>
5384 </tr>
5385 <tr><td>Reduce text size.</td>
5386 <td>Ctrl+Keypad-</td>
5387 </tr>
5388 <tr><td>Restore text size to normal.</td>
5389 <td>Ctrl+Keypad/</td>
5390 </tr>
5391 <tr><td>Indent block.</td>
5392 <td>Tab</td>
5393 </tr>
5394 <tr><td>Dedent block.</td>
5395 <td>Shift+Tab</td>
5396 </tr>
5397 <tr><td>Delete to start of word.</td>
5398 <td>Ctrl+BackSpace</td>
5399 </tr>
5400 <tr><td>Delete to end of word.</td>
5401 <td>Ctrl+Delete</td>
5402 </tr>
5403 <tr><td>Delete to start of line.</td>
5404 <td>Ctrl+Shift+BackSpace</td>
5405 </tr>
5406 <tr><td>Go to start of document.</td>
5407 <td>Ctrl+Home</td>
5408 </tr>
5409 <tr><td>Extend selection to start of document.</td>
5410 <td>Ctrl+Shift+Home</td>
5411 </tr>
5412 <tr><td>Go to start of display line.</td>
5413 <td>Alt+Home</td>
5414 </tr>
5415 <tr><td>Extend selection to start of display line.</td>
5416 <td>Alt+Shift+Home</td>
5417 </tr>
5418 <tr><td>Go to end of document.</td>
5419 <td>Ctrl+End</td>
5420 </tr>
5421 <tr><td>Extend selection to end of document.</td>
5422 <td>Ctrl+Shift+End</td>
5423 </tr>
5424 <tr><td>Extend selection to end of display line.</td>
5425 <td>Alt+Shift+End</td>
5426 </tr>
5427 <tr><td>Previous paragraph. Shift extends selection.</td>
5428 <td>Ctrl+Up</td>
5429 </tr>
5430 <tr><td>Next paragraph. Shift extends selection.</td>
5431 <td>Ctrl+Down</td>
5432 </tr>
5433 <tr><td>Previous word. Shift extends selection.</td>
5434 <td>Ctrl+Left</td>
5435 </tr>
5436 <tr><td>Next word. Shift extends selection.</td>
5437 <td>Ctrl+Right</td>
5438 </tr>
5439 </tbody>
5440 </table>
5441 </div>
5442 </div>
5443 <div class="section">
5444 <h1><a class="toc-backref" href="#id209" id="tips-and-tricks" name="tips-and-tricks">Tips and tricks</a></h1>
5445 <div class="section">
5446 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id210" id="document-notebook" name="document-notebook">Document notebook</a></h2>
5447 <ul class="simple">
5448 <li>Double-click on empty space in the notebook tab bar to open a
5449 new document.</li>
5450 <li>Middle-click on a document's notebook tab to close the document.</li>
5451 <li>Hold <cite>Ctrl</cite> and click on any notebook tab to switch to the last used
5452 document.</li>
5453 <li>Double-click on a document's notebook tab to toggle all additional
5454 widgets (to show them again use the View menu or the keyboard
5455 shortcut). The interface pref must be enabled for this to work.</li>
5456 </ul>
5457 </div>
5458 <div class="section">
5459 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id211" id="editor" name="editor">Editor</a></h2>
5460 <ul class="simple">
5461 <li>Alt-scroll wheel moves up/down a page.</li>
5462 <li>Ctrl-scroll wheel zooms in/out.</li>
5463 <li>Shift-scroll wheel scrolls 8 characters right/left.</li>
5464 <li>Ctrl-click on a word in a document to perform <em>Go to Tag Definition</em>.</li>
5465 <li>Ctrl-click on a bracket/brace to perform <em>Go to Matching Brace</em>.</li>
5466 </ul>
5467 </div>
5468 <div class="section">
5469 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id212" id="interface" name="interface">Interface</a></h2>
5470 <ul class="simple">
5471 <li>Double-click on a symbol-list group to expand or compact it.</li>
5472 </ul>
5473 </div>
5474 <div class="section">
5475 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id213" id="gtk-related" name="gtk-related">GTK-related</a></h2>
5476 <ul class="simple">
5477 <li>Scrolling the mouse wheel over a notebook tab bar will switch
5478 notebook pages.</li>
5479 </ul>
5480 <p>The following are derived from X-Windows features (but GTK still supports
5481 them on Windows):</p>
5482 <ul class="simple">
5483 <li>Middle-click pastes the last selected text.</li>
5484 <li>Middle-click on a scrollbar moves the scrollbar to that
5485 position without having to drag it.</li>
5486 </ul>
5487 </div>
5488 </div>
5489 <div class="section">
5490 <h1><a class="toc-backref" href="#id214" id="compile-time-options" name="compile-time-options">Compile-time options</a></h1>
5491 <p>There are some options which can only be changed at compile time,
5492 and some options which are used as the default for configurable
5493 options. To change these options, edit the appropriate source file
5494 in the <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">src</span></tt> subdirectory. Look for a block of lines starting with
5495 <tt class="docutils literal"><span class="pre">#define</span> <span class="pre">GEANY_*</span></tt>. Any definitions which are not listed here should
5496 not be changed.</p>
5497 <div class="note">
5498 <p class="first admonition-title">Note</p>
5499 <p class="last">Most users should not need to change these options.</p>
5500 </div>
5501 <div class="section">
5502 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id215" id="src-geany-h" name="src-geany-h">src/geany.h</a></h2>
5503 <table border="1" class="docutils">
5504 <colgroup>
5505 <col width="33%" />
5506 <col width="48%" />
5507 <col width="20%" />
5508 </colgroup>
5509 <thead valign="bottom">
5510 <tr><th class="head">Option</th>
5511 <th class="head">Description</th>
5512 <th class="head">Default</th>
5513 </tr>
5514 </thead>
5515 <tbody valign="top">
5516 <tr><td>GEANY_STRING_UNTITLED</td>
5517 <td>A string used as the default name for new
5518 files. Be aware that the string can be
5519 translated, so change it only if you know
5520 what you are doing.</td>
5521 <td>untitled</td>
5522 </tr>
5523 <tr><td>GEANY_WINDOW_MINIMAL_WIDTH</td>
5524 <td>The minimal width of the main window.</td>
5525 <td>620</td>
5526 </tr>
5527 <tr><td>GEANY_WINDOW_MINIMAL_HEIGHT</td>
5528 <td>The minimal height of the main window.</td>
5529 <td>440</td>
5530 </tr>
5531 <tr><td>GEANY_WINDOW_DEFAULT_WIDTH</td>
5532 <td>The default width of the main window at the
5533 first start.</td>
5534 <td>900</td>
5535 </tr>
5536 <tr><td>GEANY_WINDOW_DEFAULT_HEIGHT</td>
5537 <td>The default height of the main window at the
5538 first start.</td>
5539 <td>600</td>
5540 </tr>
5541 <tr><td><strong>Windows specific</strong></td>
5542 <td>&nbsp;</td>
5543 <td>&nbsp;</td>
5544 </tr>
5545 <tr><td>GEANY_USE_WIN32_DIALOG</td>
5546 <td>Set this to 1 if you want to use the default
5547 Windows file open and save dialogs instead
5548 GTK's file open and save dialogs. The
5549 default Windows file dialogs are missing
5550 some nice features like choosing a filetype
5551 or an encoding. <em>Do not touch this setting
5552 when building on a non-Win32 system.</em></td>
5553 <td>0</td>
5554 </tr>
5555 </tbody>
5556 </table>
5557 </div>
5558 <div class="section">
5559 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id216" id="project-h" name="project-h">project.h</a></h2>
5560 <table border="1" class="docutils">
5561 <colgroup>
5562 <col width="33%" />
5563 <col width="48%" />
5564 <col width="20%" />
5565 </colgroup>
5566 <thead valign="bottom">
5567 <tr><th class="head">Option</th>
5568 <th class="head">Description</th>
5569 <th class="head">Default</th>
5570 </tr>
5571 </thead>
5572 <tbody valign="top">
5573 <tr><td>GEANY_PROJECT_EXT</td>
5574 <td>The default filename extension for Geany
5575 project files. It is used when creating new
5576 projects and as filter mask for the project
5577 open dialog.</td>
5578 <td>geany</td>
5579 </tr>
5580 </tbody>
5581 </table>
5582 </div>
5583 <div class="section">
5584 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id217" id="editor-h" name="editor-h">editor.h</a></h2>
5585 <table border="1" class="docutils">
5586 <colgroup>
5587 <col width="33%" />
5588 <col width="48%" />
5589 <col width="20%" />
5590 </colgroup>
5591 <thead valign="bottom">
5592 <tr><th class="head">Option</th>
5593 <th class="head">Description</th>
5594 <th class="head">Default</th>
5595 </tr>
5596 </thead>
5597 <tbody valign="top">
5598 <tr><td>GEANY_WORDCHARS</td>
5599 <td>These characters define word boundaries when
5600 making selections and searching using word
5601 matching options.</td>
5602 <td>a string with:
5603 a-z, A-Z, 0-9 and
5604 underscore.</td>
5605 </tr>
5606 </tbody>
5607 </table>
5608 </div>
5609 <div class="section">
5610 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id218" id="keyfile-c" name="keyfile-c">keyfile.c</a></h2>
5611 <p>These are default settings that can be overridden in the <a class="reference" href="#preferences">Preferences</a> dialog.</p>
5612 <table border="1" class="docutils">
5613 <colgroup>
5614 <col width="33%" />
5615 <col width="48%" />
5616 <col width="20%" />
5617 </colgroup>
5618 <thead valign="bottom">
5619 <tr><th class="head">Option</th>
5620 <th class="head">Description</th>
5621 <th class="head">Default</th>
5622 </tr>
5623 </thead>
5624 <tbody valign="top">
5625 <tr><td>GEANY_MIN_SYMBOLLIST_CHARS</td>
5626 <td>How many characters you need to type to
5627 trigger the autocompletion list.</td>
5628 <td>4</td>
5629 </tr>
5630 <tr><td>GEANY_DISK_CHECK_TIMEOUT</td>
5631 <td>Time in seconds between checking a file for
5632 external changes.</td>
5633 <td>30</td>
5634 </tr>
5635 <tr><td>GEANY_DEFAULT_TOOLS_MAKE</td>
5636 <td>The make tool. This can also include a path.</td>
5637 <td>&quot;make&quot;</td>
5638 </tr>
5639 <tr><td>GEANY_DEFAULT_TOOLS_TERMINAL</td>
5640 <td>A terminal emulator. It has to accept the
5641 command line option &quot;-e&quot;. This can also
5642 include a path.</td>
5643 <td>&quot;xterm&quot;</td>
5644 </tr>
5645 <tr><td>GEANY_DEFAULT_TOOLS_BROWSER</td>
5646 <td>A web browser. This can also include a path.</td>
5647 <td>&quot;firefox&quot;</td>
5648 </tr>
5649 <tr><td>GEANY_DEFAULT_TOOLS_PRINTCMD</td>
5650 <td>A printing tool. It should be able to accept
5651 and process plain text files. This can also
5652 include a path.</td>
5653 <td>&quot;lpr&quot;</td>
5654 </tr>
5655 <tr><td>GEANY_DEFAULT_TOOLS_GREP</td>
5656 <td>A grep tool. It should be compatible with
5657 GNU grep. This can also include a path.</td>
5658 <td>&quot;grep&quot;</td>
5659 </tr>
5660 <tr><td>GEANY_DEFAULT_MRU_LENGTH</td>
5661 <td>The length of the &quot;Recent files&quot; list.</td>
5662 <td>10</td>
5663 </tr>
5664 <tr><td>GEANY_DEFAULT_FONT_SYMBOL_LIST</td>
5665 <td>The font used in sidebar to show symbols and
5666 open files.</td>
5667 <td>&quot;Sans 9&quot;</td>
5668 </tr>
5669 <tr><td>GEANY_DEFAULT_FONT_MSG_WINDOW</td>
5670 <td>The font used in the messages window.</td>
5671 <td>&quot;Sans 9&quot;</td>
5672 </tr>
5673 <tr><td>GEANY_DEFAULT_FONT_EDITOR</td>
5674 <td>The font used in the editor window.</td>
5675 <td>&quot;Monospace 10&quot;</td>
5676 </tr>
5677 <tr><td>GEANY_TOGGLE_MARK</td>
5678 <td>A string which is used to mark a toggled
5679 comment.</td>
5680 <td>&quot;~ &quot;</td>
5681 </tr>
5682 <tr><td>GEANY_MAX_AUTOCOMPLETE_WORDS</td>
5683 <td>How many autocompletion suggestions should
5684 Geany provide.</td>
5685 <td>30</td>
5686 </tr>
5687 </tbody>
5688 </table>
5689 </div>
5690 <div class="section">
5691 <h2><a class="toc-backref" href="#id219" id="build-c" name="build-c">build.c</a></h2>
5692 <table border="1" class="docutils">
5693 <colgroup>
5694 <col width="33%" />
5695 <col width="48%" />
5696 <col width="20%" />
5697 </colgroup>
5698 <thead valign="bottom">
5699 <tr><th class="head">Option</th>
5700 <th class="head">Description</th>
5701 <th class="head">Default</th>
5702 </tr>
5703 </thead>
5704 <tbody valign="top">
5705 <tr><td>GEANY_BUILD_ERR_HIGHLIGHT_MAX</td>
5706 <td>Amount of build error indicators to
5707 be shown in the editor window.
5708 This affects the special coloring
5709 when Geany detects a compiler output line as
5710 an error message and then highlights the
5711 corresponding line in the source code.
5712 Usually only the first few messages are
5713 interesting because following errors are
5714 just after-effects.
5715 All errors in the Compiler window are parsed
5716 and unaffected by this value.</td>
5717 <td>50</td>
5718 </tr>
5719 <tr><td>PRINTBUILDCMDS</td>
5720 <td>Every time a build menu item priority
5721 calculation is run, print the state of the
5722 menu item table in the form of the table
5723 in <a class="reference" href="#build-menu-configuration">Build Menu Configuration</a>.  May be
5724 useful to debug configuration file
5725 overloading.  Warning produces a lot of
5726 output.  Can also be enabled/disabled by the
5727 debugger by setting printbuildcmds to 1/0
5728 overriding the compile setting.</td>
5729 <td>FALSE</td>
5730 </tr>
5731 </tbody>
5732 </table>
5733 </div>
5734 </div>
5735 <div class="section">
5736 <h1><a class="toc-backref" href="#id220" id="gnu-general-public-license" name="gnu-general-public-license">GNU General Public License</a></h1>
5737 <pre class="literal-block">
5738             GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
5739                Version 2, June 1991
5740
5741  Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
5742     51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA
5743  Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
5744  of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
5745
5746                 Preamble
5747
5748   The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
5749 freedom to share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public
5750 License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
5751 software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.  This
5752 General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
5753 Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
5754 using it.  (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
5755 the GNU Library General Public License instead.)  You can apply it to
5756 your programs, too.
5757
5758   When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
5759 price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
5760 have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
5761 this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
5762 if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
5763 in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
5764
5765   To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
5766 anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
5767 These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
5768 distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
5769
5770   For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
5771 gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
5772 you have.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
5773 source code.  And you must show them these terms so they know their
5774 rights.
5775
5776   We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
5777 (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
5778 distribute and/or modify the software.
5779
5780   Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
5781 that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
5782 software.  If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
5783 want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
5784 that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
5785 authors' reputations.
5786
5787   Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
5788 patents.  We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
5789 program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
5790 program proprietary.  To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
5791 patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
5792
5793   The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
5794 modification follow.
5795
5796             GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
5797    TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
5798
5799   0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
5800 a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
5801 under the terms of this General Public License.  The &quot;Program&quot;, below,
5802 refers to any such program or work, and a &quot;work based on the Program&quot;
5803 means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
5804 that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
5805 either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
5806 language.  (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
5807 the term &quot;modification&quot;.)  Each licensee is addressed as &quot;you&quot;.
5808
5809 Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
5810 covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act of
5811 running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
5812 is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
5813 Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
5814 Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
5815
5816   1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
5817 source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
5818 conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
5819 copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
5820 notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
5821 and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
5822 along with the Program.
5823
5824 You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
5825 you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
5826
5827   2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
5828 of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
5829 distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
5830 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
5831
5832     a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
5833     stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
5834
5835     b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
5836     whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
5837     part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
5838     parties under the terms of this License.
5839
5840     c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
5841     when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
5842     interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
5843     announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
5844     notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
5845     a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
5846     these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
5847     License.  (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
5848     does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
5849     the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
5850
5851 These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
5852 identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
5853 and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
5854 themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
5855 sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But when you
5856 distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
5857 on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
5858 this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
5859 entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
5860
5861 Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
5862 your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
5863 exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
5864 collective works based on the Program.
5865
5866 In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
5867 with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
5868 a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
5869 the scope of this License.
5870
5871   3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
5872 under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
5873 Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
5874
5875     a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
5876     source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
5877     1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
5878
5879     b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
5880     years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
5881     cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
5882     machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
5883     distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
5884     customarily used for software interchange; or,
5885
5886     c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
5887     to distribute corresponding source code.  (This alternative is
5888     allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
5889     received the program in object code or executable form with such
5890     an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
5891
5892 The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
5893 making modifications to it.  For an executable work, complete source
5894 code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
5895 associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
5896 control compilation and installation of the executable.  However, as a
5897 special exception, the source code distributed need not include
5898 anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
5899 form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
5900 operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
5901 itself accompanies the executable.
5902
5903 If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
5904 access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
5905 access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
5906 distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
5907 compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5908
5909   4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
5910 except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
5911 otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
5912 void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
5913 However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
5914 this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
5915 parties remain in full compliance.
5916
5917   5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
5918 signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
5919 distribute the Program or its derivative works.  These actions are
5920 prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  Therefore, by
5921 modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
5922 Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
5923 all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
5924 the Program or works based on it.
5925
5926   6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
5927 Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
5928 original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
5929 these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
5930 restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
5931 You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
5932 this License.
5933
5934   7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
5935 infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
5936 conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
5937 otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
5938 excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot
5939 distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
5940 License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
5941 may not distribute the Program at all.  For example, if a patent
5942 license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
5943 all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
5944 the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
5945 refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
5946
5947 If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
5948 any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
5949 apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
5950 circumstances.
5951
5952 It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
5953 patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
5954 such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
5955 integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
5956 implemented by public license practices.  Many people have made
5957 generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
5958 through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
5959 system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
5960 to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
5961 impose that choice.
5962
5963 This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
5964 be a consequence of the rest of this License.
5965
5966   8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
5967 certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
5968 original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
5969 may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
5970 those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
5971 countries not thus excluded.  In such case, this License incorporates
5972 the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
5973
5974   9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
5975 of the General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
5976 be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
5977 address new problems or concerns.
5978
5979 Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the Program
5980 specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and &quot;any
5981 later version&quot;, you have the option of following the terms and conditions
5982 either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
5983 Software Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of
5984 this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
5985 Foundation.
5986
5987   10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
5988 programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
5989 to ask for permission.  For software which is copyrighted by the Free
5990 Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
5991 make exceptions for this.  Our decision will be guided by the two goals
5992 of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
5993 of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
5994
5995                 NO WARRANTY
5996
5997   11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
5998 FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN
5999 OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
6000 PROVIDE THE PROGRAM &quot;AS IS&quot; WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
6001 OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
6002 MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS
6003 TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE
6004 PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
6005 REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
6006
6007   12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
6008 WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
6009 REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
6010 INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
6011 OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
6012 TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
6013 YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
6014 PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
6015 POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
6016
6017              END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
6018
6019         How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
6020
6021   If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
6022 possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
6023 free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
6024
6025   To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
6026 to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
6027 convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
6028 the &quot;copyright&quot; line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
6029
6030     &lt;one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.&gt;
6031     Copyright (C) &lt;year&gt;  &lt;name of author&gt;
6032
6033     This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
6034     it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
6035     the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
6036     (at your option) any later version.
6037
6038     This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
6039     but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
6040     MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
6041     GNU General Public License for more details.
6042
6043     You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
6044     along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
6045     Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301 USA
6046
6047
6048 Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
6049
6050 If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
6051 when it starts in an interactive mode:
6052
6053     Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year  name of author
6054     Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
6055     This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
6056     under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
6057
6058 The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
6059 parts of the General Public License.  Of course, the commands you use may
6060 be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
6061 mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
6062
6063 You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
6064 school, if any, to sign a &quot;copyright disclaimer&quot; for the program, if
6065 necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
6066
6067   Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
6068   `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
6069
6070   &lt;signature of Ty Coon&gt;, 1 April 1989
6071   Ty Coon, President of Vice
6072
6073 This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
6074 proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you may
6075 consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
6076 library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
6077 Public License instead of this License.
6078 </pre>
6079 </div>
6080 <div class="section">
6081 <h1><a class="toc-backref" href="#id221" id="license-for-scintilla-and-scite" name="license-for-scintilla-and-scite">License for Scintilla and SciTE</a></h1>
6082 <p>Copyright 1998-2003 by Neil Hodgson &lt;neilh(at)scintilla(dot)org&gt;</p>
6083 <p>All Rights Reserved</p>
6084 <p>Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and
6085 its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
6086 provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and
6087 that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
6088 supporting documentation.</p>
6089 <p>NEIL HODGSON DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,
6090 INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN
6091 NO EVENT SHALL NEIL HODGSON BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR
6092 CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS
6093 OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
6094 OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
6095 USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.</p>
6096 </div>
6097 </div>
6098 <div class="footer">
6099 <hr class="footer" />
6100 <a class="reference" href="geany.txt">View document source</a>.
6101 Generated on: 2010-08-13 14:20 UTC.
6102 Generated by <a class="reference" href="http://docutils.sourceforge.net/">Docutils</a> from <a class="reference" href="http://docutils.sourceforge.net/rst.html">reStructuredText</a> source.
6103
6104 </div>
6105 </body>
6106 </html>